Chevrolet Corvette Z06, Coupe, Convertible car Owner Manual

2004 Chevrolet Corvette Owner Manual
Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1
Front Seats ............................................... 1-2
Safety Belts
.............................................. 1-6
Child Restraints
....................................... 1-19
Air Bag System
....................................... 1-40
Restraint System Check
............................ 1-49
Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1
Keys
........................................................ 2-3
Doors and Locks
....................................... 2-9
Windows ................................................. 2-14
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-16
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle
........... 2-19
Mirrors .................................................... 2-37
Storage Areas
......................................... 2-40
Roof Panel .............................................. 2-44
Convertible Top
....................................... 2-50
Vehicle Personalization
............................. 2-57
Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1
Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-2
Climate Controls
...................................... 3-23
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
......... 3-32
Driver Information Center (DIC)
.................. 3-48
Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-69
M
Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle
..... 4-2
Towing
................................................... 4-33
Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1
Service ..................................................... 5-3
Fuel ......................................................... 5-4
Checking Things Under the Hood
............... 5-10
Rear Axle
............................................... 5-47
Bulb Replacement
.................................... 5-48
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
......... 5-52
Tires
...................................................... 5-55
Appearance Care
..................................... 5-82
Vehicle Identification
................................. 5-91
Electrical System ...................................... 5-92
Capacities and Specifications
..................... 5-99
Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2
Customer Assistance and Information .............. 7-1
Customer Assistance and Information
........... 7-2
Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-10
Index .................................................................1
www.carburetor-manual.com
Would you like some Free Manuals?
http://carburetor-manual.com/free-shop-manual-club-t-13.html
Also visit http://freeshopmanual.com for more Free Manuals
Also Visit my website for 7 FREE Download Manuals starting
with this one.
"The ABC's of Carburetion"
Click Here Now
file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/Tim/Desktop/carburetor-manual-welcome/index.htm[4/25/2009 11:42:20 AM]
Canadian Owners
You can obtain a French copy of this manual from your
dealer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem and the
name CORVETTE and the CORVETTE Emblem are
registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time
it was printed. We reserve the right to make changes
after that time without further notice. For vehicles
first sold in Canada, substitute the name “General
Motors of Canada Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division
whenever it appears in this manual.
Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will be
there if you ever need it when you’re on the road. If you
sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it so the
new owner can use it.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 10339278 A First Edition
ii
How to Use This Manual
Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning to
end when they first receive their new vehicle. If you do
this, it will help you learn about the features and controls
for your vehicle. In this manual, you will find that pictures
and words work together to explain things.
Index
A good place to look for what you need is the Index in
back of the manual. It is an alphabetical list of what
is in the manual, and the page number where you will
find it.
© Copyright General Motors Corporation 06/19/03
All Rights Reserved
Safety Warnings and Symbols
You will find a number of safety cautions in this book.
We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you about
things that could hurt you if you were to ignore the
warning.
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Don’t,”
“Don’t do this” or “Don’t let
this happen.”
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce
the hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t,
you or others could be hurt.
iii
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this book you will find these notices:
Your vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols, used on your vehicle,
are shown along with the text describing the operation
or information relating to a specific component, control,
message, gage or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice will tell you about something that can damage
your vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be
covered by your warranty, and it could be costly.
But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid
the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors
or in different words.
You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle.
They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
iv
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage or indicator, reference the following
topics:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
Features and Controls in Section 2
Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
Climate Controls in Section 3
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators in Section 3
Audio System(s) in Section 3
Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
These are some examples of symbols you may find on your vehicle:
v
Model Reference
This manual covers these models:
Z06
Coupe
vi
Convertible
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Front Seats ......................................................1-2
Manual Seats ................................................1-2
Power Seats ..................................................1-2
Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-3
Seatback Latches ...........................................1-5
Sport Seat .....................................................1-6
Safety Belts .....................................................1-6
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone .................1-6
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts .........1-11
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-11
Driver Position ..............................................1-12
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-18
Passenger Position .......................................1-19
Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-19
Child Restraints .............................................1-19
Older Children ..............................................1-19
Infants and Young Children ............................1-22
Child Restraint Systems .................................1-25
Top Strap ....................................................1-28
Top Strap Anchor Location .............................1-30
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) ...........................1-30
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System ....................................1-33
Securing a Child Restraint in the Passenger
Seat Position ............................................1-36
Air Bag System ..............................................1-40
Where Are the Air Bags? ...............................1-42
When Should an Air Bag Inflate? ....................1-43
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? .....................1-43
How Does an Air Bag Restrain? .....................1-44
What Will You See After an
Air Bag Inflates? .......................................1-44
Air Bag Off Switch ........................................1-46
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle .........1-49
Restraint System Check ..................................1-49
Checking Your Restraint Systems ...................1-49
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash ............................................1-50
1-1
Front Seats
Power Seats
Manual Seats
If your vehicle has this feature, the control for the power
seats will be located on the outboard side of each
seat, near the base.
To move a manual seat, pull up on the lever located in
front of the seat to unlock it. Slide the seat to where
you want it and release the lever. Then try to move the
seat with your body to make sure the seat is locked
into place.
1-2
Different parts of the power seat control move different
parts of the seat. To move the seat forward or rearward,
move the control in that direction. Move the control up to
raise the seat and down to lower it. By tilting the back of
the control, it will raise or lower the back of the seat.
Tilting the front of the control will raise or lower the front of
the seat.
Your preferred seat position can be stored and recalled if
you have the memory option. See Memory on page 2-57.
Reclining Seatbacks
The lever for the reclining seatback is located on the
outboard side of each seat, near the base.
To adjust the seatback, lean slightly forward to lift your
weight off the seatback. Pull completely up on the
lever until it stops, and lean back to position the
seatback to where you want it. Release the lever to lock
the seatback into place.
1-3
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts can’t do their job
when you’re reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can’t do its job because it
won’t be against your body. Instead, it will be
in front of you. In a crash you could go into it,
receiving neck or other injuries.
But do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
1-4
The lap belt can’t do its job either. In a crash
the belt could go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not at your
pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
Seatback Latches
To unlock, lift up on the latch and push the seatback
rearward. When you return the seatback to its original
position, make sure the seatback is locked in place.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
Both seatbacks fold forward to give you access to the
rear area. To fold a seatback forward, lift this latch,
which is located on top of the backside of the seat, and
pull the seatback forward. The seatback will lock
down in this position.
1-5
Sport Seat
Safety Belts
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has this feature, there are three other
controls that help you change the shape of the seat in
addition to the power seat control. There are two lumbar
supports for the middle (A) and lower (B) back. There is
also a side bolster control (C) that adjusts the sides of the
seat around you to give you more lateral support.
For lumbar support, move each control (A) and (B)
forward to inflate or rearward to deflate.
Move the side bolster control (C) up for more side
support and down for less support.
1-6
Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you’re not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.
You can be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passenger’s belt is
fastened properly too.
{CAUTION:
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as a
reminder to buckle up.
See Safety Belt Reminder
Light on page 3-34.
In most states and all Canadian provinces, the law says
to wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.
You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have a
crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt
or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!
1-7
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat on
wheels.
1-8
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
doesn’t stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
1-9
or the instrument panel...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-10
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?
A:
You could be — whether you’re wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you’re upside down. And your chance
of being conscious during and after an accident,
so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if
you are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A:
Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in
most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts — not instead of them. Every air bag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has air
bags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
Q: If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A:
You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an
accident — even one that isn’t your fault — you
and your passenger can be hurt. Being a good
driver doesn’t protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
riding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-19
or Infants and Young Children on page 1-22. Follow
those rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
1-11
Driver Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear it
properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To see
how, see “Seats” in the Index.
1-12
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
When the lap portion of the belt is pulled out all the
way, it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the
way and start again. See “Lap Belt Cinch Feature”
later in this section.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt isn’t long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-19.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this
applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be
less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it,
the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This
could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across the
chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
Lap Belt Cinch Feature
If you do not want the lap belt to move freely, pull the
lap belt out all the way to set the lock. To permit the lap
belt to move freely again, unbuckle the belt, let it
retract all the way, and buckle up again.
1-13
Q: What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A:
1-14
The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearly
as much protection this way.
Q: What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A:
The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-15
Q: What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
A:
1-16
The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
Q: What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.
A:
The belt is twisted across the body.
1-17
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-18
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more
likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Child Restraints
Older Children
Passenger Position
The passenger’s safety belt works the same way as the
driver’s safety belt. See Driver Position on page 1-12.
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your
dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so
the extender will be long enough for you. The extender
will be just for you, and just for the seat in your
vehicle that you choose. Don’t let someone else use it,
and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear
it, just attach it to the regular safety belt.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-19
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: If possible, an older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt
should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt
should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the
top of the thighs. It should never be worn over
the abdomen, which could cause severe or even
fatal internal injuries in a crash.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can’t properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
1-20
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt
is very close to the child’s face or neck?
A:
Move the child toward the center of the vehicle,
but be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the
child’s shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper
body would have the restraint that belts provide.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the belt in
this way, in a crash the child might slide under
the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied
right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries.
The lap portion of the belt should be worn low and snug
on the hips, just touching the child’s thighs. This
applies belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.
1-21
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the
need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact, the
law in every state in the United States and in every
Canadian province says children up to some age must be
restrained while in a vehicle.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.
Instead, they need to use a child restraint.
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh
much – until a crash. During a crash a baby will
become so heavy it is not possible to hold it.
CAUTION:
1-22
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
For example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly
become a 240-lb. (110 kg) force on a person’s
arms. A baby should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any air bag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer outstanding protection for adults
and older children, but not for young children
and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt
system nor its air bag system is designed for
them. Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can
provide.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
A:
Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by
the vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic
types. Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight,
height and age but also whether or not the restraint
will be compatible with the motor vehicle in
which it will be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing
a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be
used in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will
have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
1-23
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck. This is
necessary because a newborn infant’s neck is
weak and its head weighs so much compared
with the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a
rear-facing seat settles into the restraint, so the
crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and
shoulders. Infants always should be secured in
appropriate infant restraints.
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body area
that’s unprotected by any bony structure.
This alone could cause serious or fatal
injuries. Young children always should be
secured in appropriate child restraints.
1-24
Child Restraint Systems
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed
to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat
surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward
the center of the vehicle.
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with
the seating surface against the back of the infant.
The harness system holds the infant in place and,
in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in
the restraint.
1-25
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
1-26
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
Some booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner,
and some high-back booster seats have a five-point
harness. A booster seat can also help a child to see
out the window.
Q: How do child restraints work?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which
is purchased by the vehicle’s owner.
For many years, add-on child restraints have used
the adult belt system in the vehicle. To help
reduce the chance of injury, the child also has to be
secured within the restraint. The vehicle’s belt
system secures the add-on child restraint in the
vehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harness
system holds the child in place within the restraint.
One system, the three-point harness, has straps that
come down over each of the infant’s shoulders and
buckle together at the crotch. The five-point harness
system has two shoulder straps, two hip straps and a
crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hip
straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that
are attached to a flat pad which rests low against the
child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has
straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield
that swings up or to the side.
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is,
it will have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system in
your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured
within the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal
injury. When securing an add-on child restraint, refer
to the instructions that come with the restraint which may
be on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and
to this manual. The child restraint instructions are
important, so if they are not available, obtain a
replacement copy from the manufacturer.
The child restraint must be secured properly in the
passenger seat. If you want to secure a rear-facing child
restraint in the passenger’s seat, turn off the passenger’s
air bag. See Air Bag Off Switch on page 1-46 and
Securing a Child Restraint in the Passenger Seat
Position on page 1-36 for more on this, including
important safety information.
1-27
Top Strap
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the passenger’s air
bag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close
to the inflating air bag. Be sure to turn off the
air bag before using a rear-facing child
restraint in the passenger seat position.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle – even when no child
is in it.
1-28
Some child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether.”
It can help restrain the child restraint during a collision.
For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored
to the vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraints
are designed for use with or without the top strap
being anchored. Others require the top strap always
to be anchored. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions for your child restraint. If yours requires that
the top strap be anchored, do not use the restraint
unless it is anchored properly.
If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be
anchored. In the United States, some child restraints
also have a top strap. If your child restraint has a
top strap, it should be anchored.
If your vehicle is a convertible or has a removable roof
panel, do not use a child restraint that requires a
top strap in your vehicle because the strap cannot be
anchored properly.
Once you have the top strap anchored, you will be
ready to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top
strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions say.
1-29
Top Strap Anchor Location
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers
for Children (LATCH System)
Your vehicle has the LATCH system. You will find
anchors (A) for the passenger seat.
If your vehicle is a Z06, an anchor bracket for a top
strap is located behind the passengers’s seat in
the cargo area. Anchor the top strap to the bracket.
If your vehicle is a convertible or has a removable roof
panel, do not use a child restraint that requires a
top strap in your vehicle because the top strap cannot
be anchored properly.
1-30
This system, designed to make installation of child
restraints easier, does not use the vehicle’s safety belts.
Instead, it uses vehicle anchors (A,B) and child restraint
attachments to secure the restraints. Some restraints
also use another vehicle anchor to secure a top tether
strap (C).
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,
you need a child restraint designed for that system.
1-31
To assist you in locating the lower anchors for this child
restraint system, each seating position with the
LATCH system has a label on the seatback at each
lower anchor position.
The labels are located
near the base of the
passenger seat.
1-32
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached
to its anchorage points, the restraint will not
be able to protect the child correctly. In a
crash, the child could be seriously injured or
killed. Make sure that a LATCH-type child
restraint is properly installed using the
anchorage points, or use the vehicle’s safety
belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed
for the LATCH System
Your vehicle has a passenger air bag. There is an air
bag off switch in the glove box you can use to turn
off the passenger’s air bag when you need to secure a
child restraint in the passenger position. See Air Bag
Off Switch on page 1-46 for more on this including
important safety information.
Unless the passenger’s air bag has been turned off,
never put a rear-facing child restraint in this vehicle.
1-33
Here is why:
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the passenger’s air
bag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close
to the inflating air bag. Do not use a rear-facing
child restraint in this vehicle unless the
passenger’s air bag has been turned off.
Even though the air bag off switch is designed
to turn off the passenger’s frontal air bag, no
system is fail-safe, and no one can guarantee
that an air bag will not deploy under some
unusual circumstance, even though it is turned
off. We recommend that rear-facing child
restraints be transported in vehicles with a rear
seat that will accommodate a rear-facing child
restraint, whenever possible.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the passenger seat, always move the passenger
seat as far back as it will go.
1-34
If the air bag readiness light ever comes on
when you have turned off the air bag, it means
that something may be wrong with the air bag
system. The passenger’s air bag could inflate
even though the switch is off. If this ever
happens, don’t let anyone whom the national
government has identified as a member
of a passenger air bag risk group sit in the
passenger’s position (for example, don’t
secure a rear-facing child restraint in your
vehicle) until you have your vehicle serviced.
See “Air Bag Off Switch” in the Index.
If your vehicle is a convertible or has a removable roof
panel, there are no top strap anchors in your vehicle.
Do not secure a child seat in a convertible or a vehicle
with a removable roof panel, if a national or local
law requires that the top strap be anchored, or if the
instructions that come with the restraint say that the top
strap must be anchored.
1. Your vehicle has a passenger’s air bag. See Air
Bag Off Switch on page 1-46. If your child restraint
is forward-facing, always move the seat as far
back as it will go before securing it in this seat.
See Manual Seats on page 1-2 or Power Seats on
page 1-2. Never use a rear-facing child restraint
in this seat unless the air bag is off.
2. Find the LATCH anchorages in the passenger seat.
See Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-30.
3. Put the child restraint on the seat.
4. Attach and tighten the LATCH attachments on the
child restraint to the LATCH anchorages in the
vehicle. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
5. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach and
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchorage if
your vehicle has one. The child restraint instructions
will show you how. Also see Top Strap on page 1-28.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, simply unhook the top
tether from the top tether anchorage and then
disconnect the LATCH anchorages.
Turn on the passenger’s air bag when you remove the
child restraint from the vehicle unless the person
who will be sitting there is a member of a passenger air
bag risk group. See Air Bag Off Switch on page 1-46.
{CAUTION:
If the passenger’s air bag is turned off for a
person who isn’t in a risk group identified by
the national government, that person won’t
have the extra protection of an air bag. In a
crash, the air bag wouldn’t be able to inflate
and help protect the person sitting there.
Don’t turn off the passenger’s air bag unless
the person sitting there is in a risk group.
See “Air Bag Off Switch” in the Index for more
on this, including important safety information.
1-35
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Passenger Seat Position
Your vehicle has a passenger air bag. There is an air
bag off switch in the glove box you can use to turn
off the passenger’s air bag when you need to secure a
child restraint in the passenger position. See Air Bag
Off Switch on page 1-46 for more on this including
important safety information.
Unless the passenger’s air bag has been turned off,
never put a rear-facing child restraint in this vehicle.
1-36
Here is why:
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the passenger’s air
bag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close
to the inflating air bag. Do not use a
rear-facing child restraint in this vehicle unless
the passenger’s air bag has been turned off.
Even though the air bag off switch is designed
to turn off the passenger’s frontal air bag, no
system is fail-safe, and no one can guarantee
that an air bag will not deploy under some
unusual circumstance, even though it is turned
off. We recommend that rear-facing child
restraints be transported in vehicles with a
rear seat that will accommodate a rear-facing
child restraint, whenever possible.
If the air bag readiness light ever comes on
when you have turned off the air bag, it means
that something may be wrong with the air bag
system. The passenger’s air bag could inflate
even though the switch is off. If this ever
happens, don’t let anyone whom the national
government has identified as a member of a
passenger air bag risk group sit in the
passenger’s position (for example, don’t
secure a rear-facing child restraint in your
vehicle) until you have your vehicle serviced.
See “Air Bag Off Switch” in the Index.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the passenger seat, always move the
passenger seat as far back as it will go.
1-37
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-30. See Top Strap
on page 1-28 if the child restraint has one.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
If your vehicle is a convertible or has a removable roof
panel, there are no top strap anchors in your vehicle.
Do not secure a child seat in a convertible or a vehicle
with a removable roof panel, if a national or local
law requires that the top strap be anchored, or if the
instructions that come with the restraint say that the top
strap must be anchored.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system
you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
1. Your vehicle has a passenger’s air bag. See Air
Bag Off Switch on page 1-46. If your child restraint
is forward-facing, always move the seat as far
back as it will go before securing it in this seat.
See Manual Seats on page 1-2 or Power Seats on
page 1-2. Never use a rear-facing child restraint
in this seat unless the air bag is off.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1-38
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. Pull the rest of the lap belt all the way out of the
retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, feed the lap belt back into the
retractor while you push down on the child restraint.
You may find it helpful to use your knee to push
down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-39
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
Turn on the passenger’s air bag when you remove the
child restraint from the vehicle unless the person
who will be sitting there is a member of a passenger air
bag risk group. See Air Bag Off Switch on page 1-46.
{CAUTION:
If the passenger’s air bag is turned off for a
person who isn’t in a risk group identified by
the national government, that person won’t
have the extra protection of an air bag. In a
crash, the air bag wouldn’t be able to inflate
and help protect the person sitting there.
Don’t turn off the passenger’s air bag unless
the person sitting there is in a risk group.
See “Air Bag Off Switch” in the Index for more
on this, including important safety information.
Air Bag System
This part explains the air bag system.
Your vehicle has air bags – one air bag for the driver
and another air bag for the passenger.
Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk of
injury from the force of an inflating air bag. But these
air bags must inflate very quickly to do their job
and comply with federal regulations.
Here are the most important things to know about the
air bag system:
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you aren’t wearing your safety belt — even if
you have air bags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected
from it. Air bags are designed to work with
safety belts, but don’t replace them. Air bags
are designed to deploy only in moderate to
severe frontal and near frontal crashes.
CAUTION:
1-40
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
lThey aren’t designed to inflate at all in
rollover, rear or low-speed frontal crashes,
or in many side crashes. And, for some
unrestrained occupants, air bags may provide
less protection in frontal crashes than more
forceful air bags have provided in the past.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there’s an air
bag for that person.
{CAUTION:
Air bags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. If you’re too close to an
inflating air bag, as you would be if you were
leaning forward, it could seriously injure you.
Safety belts help keep you in position before
and during a crash. Always wear your safety
belt, even with air bags. The driver should sit
as far back as possible while still maintaining
control of the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Anyone who is up against, or very close to, any
air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
the best protection for adults, but not for young
children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety
belt system nor its air bag system is designed
for them. Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can
provide. Always secure children properly in
your vehicle. To read how, see Older Children
on page 1-19 and Infants and Young Children
on page 1-22.
There is a air bag
readiness light on the
instrument panel, which
shows the air bag symbol.
The system checks the air bag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Air Bag Readiness Light on page 3-35
for more information.
1-41
Where Are the Air Bags?
The passenger’s air bag is in the instrument panel on
the passenger’s side.
The driver’s air bag is in the middle of the steering
wheel.
1-42
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
air bag, the bag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t put
anything between an occupant and an air bag,
and don’t attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any other air
bag covering.
When Should an Air Bag Inflate?
An air bag is designed to inflate in a moderate to severe
frontal, or near-frontal crash. The air bag will inflate
only if the impact speed is above the system’s designed
“threshold level.” If your vehicle goes straight into a
wall that does not move or deform, the threshold level
is about 9 to 15 mph (14 to 24 km/h). The threshold
level can vary, however, with specific vehicle design,
so that it can be somewhat above or below this range.
If your vehicle strikes something that will move or
deform, such as a parked car, the threshold level
will be higher. The air bag is not designed to inflate in
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts because
inflation would not help the occupant.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air
bag should have inflated simply because of the damage
to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.
Inflation is determined by the angle of the impact
and how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal or
near-frontal impacts.
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. The
sensing system triggers a release of gas from the
inflator, which inflates the air bag. The inflator, air bag
and related hardware are all part of the air bag modules
inside the steering wheel and in the instrument panel
in front of the passenger.
1-43
How Does an Air Bag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. Air bags supplement the
protection provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute
the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant’s
upper body, stopping the occupant more gradually.
But air bags would not help you in many types of
collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts and many
side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion is
not toward those air bags. Air bags should never be
regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety
belts, and then only in moderate to severe frontal or
near-frontal collisions.
What Will You See After an Air Bag
Inflates?
After the air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly that
some people may not even realize the air bag inflated.
Some components of the air bag module – the steering
wheel hub for the driver’s air bag, the instrument panel for
the passenger’s bag – will be hot for a short time. The
parts of the bag that come into contact with you may be
warm, but not too hot to touch. There will be some smoke
and dust coming from the vents in the deflated air bags.
Air bag inflation doesn’t prevent the driver from seeing or
being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it stop people
from leaving the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
When an air bag inflates, there is dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble.
CAUTION:
1-44
(Continued)
• Your vehicle is equipped with a diagnostic module,
CAUTION:
(Continued)
To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle should
get out as soon as it is safe to do so. If you
have breathing problems but can’t get out of
the vehicle after an air bag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or a door. If you
experience breathing problems following an air
bag deployment, you should seek medical
attention.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the air bag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from
the passenger air bag.
which records information about the air bag system.
The module records information about the readiness
of the system, when the system commands air bag
inflation and driver’s safety belt usage at deployment.
The module also records speed, engine rpm, brake
and throttle data.
• Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag
systems. Improper service can mean that an air bag
system won’t work properly. See your dealer for
service.
Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s
or the passenger’s air bag, the bag may not work
properly. You may have to replace the air bag module
in the steering wheel or both the air bag module and
the instrument panel for the passenger’s air bag.
Do not open or break the air bag coverings.
• Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After an
air bag inflates, you’ll need some new parts for your
air bag system. If you don’t get them, the air bag
system won’t be there to help protect you in another
crash. A new system will include air bag modules
and possibly other parts. The service manual for your
vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
1-45
Air Bag Off Switch
Your vehicle has a switch in the glove box that you can
use to turn off the passenger’s air bag.
This switch should only be turned to AIR BAG OFF if
the person in the passenger’s position is a member of a
passenger risk group identified by the national
government as follows:
Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old)
must ride in the front seat because:
• my vehicle has no rear seat;
• my vehicle has a rear seat too small to
accommodate a rear-facing infant seat; or
• the infant has a medical condition which, according
to the infant’s physician, makes it necessary for the
infant to ride in the front seat so that the driver
can constantly monitor the child’s condition.
Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 must
ride in the front seat because:
• my vehicle has no rear seat;
• although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rear
seat(s) whenever possible, children ages 1 to 12
sometimes must ride in the front because no space
is available in the rear seat(s) of my vehicle; or
• the child has a medical condition which, according
to the child’s physician, makes it necessary for the
child to ride in the front seat so that the driver
can constantly monitor the child’s condition.
1-46
Medical Condition. A passenger has a
medical condition which, according to his
or her physician:
• causes the passenger air bag to pose a special risk
for the passenger; and
• makes the potential harm from the passenger air
bag in a crash greater than the potential harm
from turning off the air bag and allowing the
passenger, even if belted, to hit the dashboard or
windshield in a crash.
{CAUTION:
If the passenger’s air bag is turned off for a
person who isn’t in a risk group identified by
the national government, that person won’t
have the extra protection of an air bag. In a
crash, the air bag wouldn’t be able to inflate
and help protect the person sitting there.
Don’t turn off the passenger’s air bag unless
the person sitting there is in a risk group.
To turn off the passenger’s air bag, insert your ignition
key into the switch, push in, and move the switch to
the off position.
1-47
The AIR BAG OFF light on the center console switch
panel will come on to let you know that the passenger’s
air bag is off. The passenger’s air bag will remain off until
you turn it back on again, and the AIR BAG OFF light will
stay on to remind you that the air bag is off.
To turn the passenger’s air bag on again, insert your
ignition key into the switch, push in, and move the switch
to the on position.
1-48
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped
Vehicle
Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the air bag system in several places
around your vehicle. You don’t want the system to
inflate while someone is working on your vehicle.
Your dealer and the service manual have information
about servicing your vehicle and the air bag system.
To purchase a service manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 7-11.
{CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected,
an air bag can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if you are close to
an air bag when it inflates. Avoid yellow wires,
wires wrapped with yellow tape or yellow
connectors. They are probably part of the air
bag system. Be sure to follow proper service
procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
Restraint System Check
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.
1-49
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may
not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if worn
during a more severe crash, then you need new parts.
1-50
If you ever see a label on the driver’s safety belt that
says to replace the belt, be sure to do so. Then the new
belt will be there to help protect you in a collision.
You would see this label on the belt near the latch plate.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have safety belt
or seat parts repaired or replaced. New parts and
repairs may be necessary even it the belt wasn’t being
used at the time of the collision.
If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag
system parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier
in this section.
Section 2
Features and Controls
Keys ...............................................................2-3
Remote Keyless Entry System .........................2-5
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation ...........2-6
Doors and Locks .............................................2-9
Door Locks ....................................................2-9
Power Door Locks ........................................2-10
Lockout Protection ........................................2-10
Leaving Your Vehicle ....................................2-10
Hatch/Trunk .................................................2-11
Windows ........................................................2-14
Power Windows ............................................2-15
Sun Visors ...................................................2-15
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-16
Theft-Deterrent System ..................................2-16
PASS-Key® ..................................................2-18
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-19
New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-19
Front Air Dam ..............................................2-19
Ignition Positions ..........................................2-20
Starting Your Engine .....................................2-21
Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-23
Automatic Transmission Operation ...................2-25
Manual Transmission Operation ......................2-28
Parking Brake ..............................................2-31
Shifting Into Park (P) .....................................2-32
Shifting Out of Park (P) .................................2-34
Parking Your Vehicle (Manual Transmission) ......2-35
Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-35
Engine Exhaust ............................................2-36
Running Your Engine While You Are Parked
(Automatic Transmission) ............................2-36
Mirrors ...........................................................2-37
Manual Rearview Mirror .................................2-37
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror ................2-38
Outside Power Heated Mirrors ........................2-38
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ..................2-39
Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-39
2-1
Section 2
Features and Controls
Storage Areas ................................................2-40
Glove Box ...................................................2-40
Cupholder(s) ................................................2-40
Center Console Storage Area .........................2-40
Floor Mats ...................................................2-41
Rear Storage Area ........................................2-42
Convenience Net ..........................................2-43
Cargo Cover ................................................2-43
2-2
Roof Panel .....................................................2-44
Removing the Roof Panel ..............................2-44
Storing the Roof Panel ..................................2-47
Installing the Roof Panel ................................2-49
Convertible Top ..............................................2-50
Lowering the Convertible Top .........................2-51
Raising the Convertible Top ...........................2-55
Vehicle Personalization ...................................2-57
Memory .......................................................2-57
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. They
could operate the power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move.
The children or others could be badly injured
or even killed. Do not leave the keys in a
vehicle with children.
2-3
One key is used for the
ignition, the driver’s door
and all other locks.
The paper tag has a code on it that tells your dealer or
a qualified locksmith how to make an extra key.
Keep the bar-coded tag in a safe place. If you lose your
key, you’ll be able to have a new one made easily
using this tag. If your key doesn’t have a tag and you
need a new ignition key, go to your dealer for the correct
key code.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle, call
Chevrolet Roadside Assistance. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 7-6 for more information.
When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer gives the
first owner a key and a bar coded tag. Both the key and
the tag are attached to a key ring.
2-4
Remote Keyless Entry System
Your vehicle has a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system
that operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
If you ever notice a decrease in the remote keyless
entry transmitter range, try doing one of the following:
• Check the distance. You may be too far from
your vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on
page 2-6.
• Check to make sure that an electronic device such
as a cellular phone or lap top computer is not
causing interference.
• If you’re still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.
2-5
Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation
Your vehicle has a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system
that allows you to lock and unlock your doors, unlock
your hatch/trunk lid, turn the panic alarm on and off and
disarm or arm your theft-deterrent system. The range
distance is as much as 100 feet (30 m) away.
Your vehicle comes
standard with two
transmitters, and up to
three can be matched
to your vehicle.
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” later in
this section.
2-6
The driver’s door will unlock when the unlock button on
the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed, or
press the unlock button again within five seconds to
unlock both doors. Also, by pressing the unlock button,
it may automatically disarm your theft-deterrent
system, depending on how the theft-deterrent system is
programmed. If it is dark enough outside, your interior
lamps will come on.
Your memory settings will also be recalled when you
press the unlock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter. See Memory on page 2-57 for more
information.
The hatch/trunk lid will release when the button with the
trunk symbol is pressed, as long as the ignition is
turned to OFF.
The system has a feature that makes it difficult for you to
lock your key in your vehicle. If you leave your key in the
ignition and attempt to lock the doors, the vehicle will not
lock and a chime will sound to remind you that the key is
in the ignition. If the door lock is pressed again, within five
seconds, the doors will lock and the keys can be locked in
the vehicle. This system cannot guarantee that you will
never be locked out of your vehicle. Always remember to
take your key with you.
Remote Alarm
When you press the horn button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter, the horn will sound. This panic
alarm button will allow you to attract attention, if needed.
If the horn alarm sounds, there are three ways to turn
it off:
• Press the panic alarm button again on the remote
keyless entry transmitter.
• Wait 90 seconds, and the horn will turn off by itself.
• Turn the key to any position in the ignition,
except OFF.
Remote Keyless Entry Settings
You can adjust the settings on the system through the
Driver Information Center (DIC). You can change
the type of alarm used by the theft-deterrent system.
See DIC Controls and Displays on page 3-49 for more
information.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring
any remaining transmitters with you when you go to
your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock
your vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of three
transmitters matched to it.
To match transmitters to your vehicle, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition key to ON.
2. Clear any warning messages on the Driver
Information Center (DIC) by pressing the RESET
button.
3. Press the OPTIONS button on the DIC several
times until the blank page is displayed, then
press and hold the RESET button for two seconds.
4. When the message FOB TRAINING is displayed,
press the RESET button once. The message
HOLD LK + UNLK 1ST FOB will be displayed in
the DIC.
2-7
5. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on the
first transmitter simultaneously for five seconds.
6. When a transmitter is learned (matched), the DIC
will display FOB LEARNED and then prompt you to
learn the second transmitter.
7. Repeat Steps 5 and 6 for the third transmitter.
8. Remove the key from the ignition.
The programming mode will shut off if any of following
has occurred:
• You do not program any transmitters for two minutes.
• You take the key out of the ignition.
• You have programmed three transmitters.
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about three years.
1. Insert a coin or similar object into the slot on the
back of the transmitter and gently pry apart the
front and back.
2. Gently pull the battery out of the transmitter.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter will not
work at the normal range in any location. If you have
to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it is probably time to change the battery.
3. Put the new battery in the transmitter, positive (+)
side up. Use a battery, type CR2032, or equivalent.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
5. Test the transmitter.
2-8
4. Reassemble the transmitter. Make sure to put
it together so water will not get in.
Doors and Locks
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
Door Locks
To lock or unlock the door from the outside, use your
door key on the drivers’s side or the remote keyless
entry transmitter.
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers — especially children — can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked,
the handle will not open it. You increase
the chance of being thrown out of the
vehicle in a crash if the doors are not
locked. So, wear safety belts properly and
lock the doors whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
If your theft-deterrent system is armed, unlock the
driver’s door with the key or by using the remote keyless
entry transmitter to open either door to avoid setting
off the alarm. See Theft-Deterrent System on page 2-16.
To lock the door from the inside, move the lever located
on the door forward. To unlock it, move the lever on
the door rearward.
2-9
Power Door Locks
Lockout Protection
If you press the power door lock switch when a door is
open and a key is in the ignition, a chime will sound.
If the power door lock switch is pressed again within five
seconds, the doors will lock.
Leaving Your Vehicle
If you are leaving the vehicle, take your key, open your
door and set the locks from inside or with the remote
keyless entry transmitter. Then get out and close
the door.
Press the power door switch on either door to unlock or
lock both doors at once.
2-10
Hatch/Trunk
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the
hatch/trunk lid open because carbon monoxide
(CO) gas can come into your vehicle. You can
not see or smell CO. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death. If you must
drive with the hatch/trunk lid open or if
electrical wiring or other cable connections
must pass through the seal between the body
and the hatch/trunk lid:
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed and select the
control setting that will force outside air
into your vehicle. See Dual Automatic
Climate Control System on page 3-23.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
Notice: Closing the hatch/trunk lid forcefully or
from the sides can cause damage to the glass, the
defogger or the weather stripping. Be sure objects
will fit in the hatch/trunk area before closing the
hatch/trunk lid. When closing the hatch/trunk
lid, gently pull down from the center.
Notice: Do not store heavy or sharp objects in
the rear storage compartments located in the
hatch/trunk area. If you do, the objects could
damage the underbody.
See Engine Exhaust on page 2-36.
2-11
Hatch/Trunk Lid Release
If your vehicle is equipped with a hatch and you have lost
battery power, use the manual release cables to open the
hatch. To access the cables, remove the two access
panels located in the rear of the trunk area. There is one
cable located under each access panel. See Rear
Storage Area on page 2-42 for more information.
To use the hatch/trunk lid release on vehicles with an
automatic transmission, your vehicle must be in
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). For manual transmissions,
set the parking brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-31.
Press the button with the trunk symbol on it, located
at the left side of the steering column on the instrument
panel, to release the hatch/trunk lid from inside your
vehicle.
The remote keyless entry transmitter will also release
the hatch/trunk lid. See Remote Keyless Entry System
on page 2-5.
2-12
Pull each cable straight down for each latch to release
the hatch.
If your vehicle is equipped with a convertible top/hardtop
and you have lost battery power, use the manual
release cable to open the trunk lid. To access the cable,
remove the center storage compartment lid located in
the rear of the trunk area. See Rear Storage Area
on page 2-42 for more information.
Emergency Trunk Release Handle
(Convertible Only)
Pull the cable straight down to release the trunk lid.
If your vehicle is equipped with a convertible top
and trunk release handle and you have lost battery
power, use the trunk release handle to open the trunk.
Notice: Using the emergency trunk release handle
as a tie-down or anchor point when securing items in
the trunk may damage it. Use the emergency trunk
release handle only to help you open the trunk lid.
There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk release
handle located on the rear wall of the trunk below the
latch. This handle will glow following exposure to
light. Pull the release handle down to open the trunk
from the inside.
2-13
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat and
suffer permanent injuries or even death from
heat stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless
adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle, especially with
the windows closed in warm or hot weather.
2-14
Power Windows
You can also open the window any amount by pressing
and releasing the switch.
With power windows, switches on the door control each
window when the ignition is on or when RAP is present.
See “Retained Accessory Power (RAP)” under Ignition
Positions on page 2-20.
To close the window, press and hold the up arrow.
Express-Down Window
Sun Visors
To block out glare, you can swing down the visors.
You can also swing them to the side.
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirrors
Pull down the sun visor and lift the cover to expose the
lighted vanity mirror. When the cover is lifted, the lamps
will come on automatically, even if the ignition is off.
Both driver’s and passenger’s window switches have
the express-down feature. Tap AUTO and immediately
release. The window will lower completely. To stop
the express-down feature from lowering the window
completely, simply tap the switch again.
2-15
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Arming the System
Vehicle theft is big business, expecially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal. However, there are ways you
can help.
Use one of the two following items listed here to arm
the system:
Theft-Deterrent System
Your vehicle is equipped with a theft-deterrent alarm
system.
With this system, the
SECURITY light will flash
as you open the door if your
ignition is off. This light
reminds you to arm the
theft-deterent system.
• Press the lock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
• Open the door. The SECURITY light should flash.
Lock the door with the power door lock switch.
The SECURITY light will stop flashing and stay on.
Close the door. The security light should go off.
Now, if a door or the hatch/trunk lid is opened without
the key or the remote keyless entry transmitter, the
alarm will go off. Your horn will sound for two minutes,
then it will go off to save battery power. And, your
vehicle will not start.
The theft-deterrent system will not arm if you lock the
driver’s door with a key, the manual door lock, or if you
use the power door lock after the doors are closed.
If your passenger stays in the vehicle when you leave
with the keys, have the passenger lock the vehicle after
the doors are closed. This way the alarm will not arm,
and your passenger will not set it off.
2-16
Testing the Alarm
Disarming the System
To test the system, do the following:
1. Make sure the hatch/trunk lid is latched.
2. Lower the window on the driver’s door.
3. Manually arm the system.
4. Close the doors and wait 15 seconds.
5. Reach through the open window and manually
unlock the driver’s door.
6. Open the door. The alarm should sound.
7. Turn off the alarm.
Always use your key or the remote keyless entry
transmitter to unlock a door. Unlocking a door any other
way will set off the alarm. If your alarm sounds, listed
below are the ways you can disarm it.
• Unlock the driver’s door with your key.
• Put the key in the ignition.
• Press the unlock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter.
If the alarm is inoperative, check to see if the horn
works. If not, check the horn fuse. See Fuses and
Circuit Breakers on page 5-93. If the horn works,
but the alarm does not go off, see your dealer.
2-17
PASS-Key®
Your vehicle is equipped
with the PASS-Key®
(Personalized Automotive
Security System)
theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key® is a passive
theft-deterrent system.
It works when you insert
or remove the key from
the ignition.
PASS-Key® uses a resistor pellet in the ignition key that
matches a decoder in your vehicle.
®
When the PASS-Key system senses that someone is
using the wrong key, it shuts down the vehicle’s
starter and fuel systems. For about three minutes, the
starter will not work and fuel will not go to the engine.
If someone tries to start your vehicle again or uses
another key during this time, the shutdown period will
start over again. This discourages someone from
randomly trying different keys with different resistor
pellets in an attempt to make a match.
2-18
The key must be clean and dry before it is inserted in
the ignition or the engine may not start. If the SECURITY
light comes on, the key may be dirty or wet.
If this happens and the starter will not work, turn the
ignition off. Clean and dry the key, wait three minutes and
try again. If the starter still will not work, wait three
minutes and try the other ignition key. At this time, you
may also want to check the fuses. See Fuses and Circuit
Breakers on page 5-93. If the starter will not work with the
other key, your vehicle needs service. If your vehicle
does start, the first ignition key may be faulty. See your
dealer or a locksmith who can service the PASS-Key®.
If you accidentally use a key that has a damaged or
missing resistor pellet, you will see no SECURITY light.
You do not have to wait three minutes before trying
the proper key.
If the resistor pellet is damaged or missing, the starter
will not work. Use the other ignition key, and see
your dealer or a locksmith who can service the
PASS-Key® to have a new key made.
If the SECURITY light comes on while driving, have
your vehicle serviced as soon as possible.
If you lose or damage a PASS-Key® ignition key, see
your dealer or a locksmith who can service PASS-Key®.
In an emergency, call Chevrolet Roadside Assistance.
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6 for more
information.
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
“break-in.” But it will perform better in the long run
if you follow these guidelines:
• Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less for
the first 500 miles (805 km).
• Do not drive at any one speed — fast or
slow — for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts.
Front Air Dam
Your vehicle is equipped with a front air dam which has
minimal ground clearance for aerodynamics. For this
reason, the air dam has a spring-loaded hinge provided
and it will retract with road contact.
Under normal operation, the air dam will occasionally
contact some road surfaces (speed bumps, driveway
ramps, etc.). This can be heard inside the vehicle as a
scraping noise. This is normal and does not indicate
a problem.
Use care when approaching bumps or objects on road
surfaces and avoid them when possible.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time your new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new
linings can mean premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline
every time you get new brake linings.
2-19
Ignition Positions
With the key in the ignition
switch, you can turn it to
four different positions.
OFF: This is the only position from which you can
remove the key.
If you have an automatic transmission, the ignition
switch cannot be turned to OFF unless the shift lever
is in PARK (P).
ACC (ACCESSORY): This is the position in which you
can operate your electrical accessories.
2-20
{CAUTION:
If you have a manual transmission removing
the key from the ignition switch will lock the
steering column and result in a loss of ability to
steer the vehicle. This could cause a collision.
If you need to turn the engine off while the
vehicle is moving, turn the key to ACC.
Notice: If your key seems stuck in OFF and you
can not turn it, be sure you are using the correct
key; if so, is it all the way in? Turn the key only with
your hand. Using a tool to force it could break the
key or the ignition switch. If none of this works,
then your vehicle needs service.
ON: This is the position to which the switch returns
after you start the engine and release the key.
The switch stays in ON while the engine is running.
But even when the engine is not running, you can use
ON to operate your electrical accessories and to display
some instrument panel cluster messages and telltales.
START: This position starts the engine. When the
engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch will
return to ON for normal driving.
When the engine is not running, ACCESSORY and ON
allow you to operate your electrical accessories,
such as the radio.
A warning tone will sound if you open the driver’s door
while the ignition is in OFF or ACCESSORY and
the key is in the ignition.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
With RAP, your power windows and the audio system
will continue to work for up to 15 minutes after the
ignition key is turned to OFF and neither door is opened.
If a door is opened, the power windows and audio
system will shut off.
Starting Your Engine
This vehicle has a computer system that monitors
engine speed, throttle and pedal position, and records
the current status.
Automatic Transmission
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine will not start in any other position – that is
a safety feature. To restart when you are already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
2-21
Manual Transmission
The shift lever should be in NEUTRAL and the parking
brake engaged. Hold the clutch pedal to the floor
and start the engine. Your vehicle will not start if the
clutch pedal is not all the way down – that is a safety
feature.
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts,
let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
your engine gets warm.
Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to
be drained much sooner. And the excessive
heat can damage your starter motor. Wait about
15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining
your battery or damaging your starter.
2. If it does not start within 10 seconds, push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor, while
you hold the ignition key in START. When the
engine starts, let go of the key and let up on the
accelerator pedal. Wait about 15 seconds between
each try.
2-22
When starting your engine in very cold weather
(below 0°F or −18°C), do this:
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START and hold it there up to
15 seconds. When the engine starts, let go of
the key.
2. If your engine still will not start (or starts but then
stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way
to the floor and holding it there as you hold the key
in START for about three seconds. When the
engine starts, let go of the key and accelerator.
If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again,
do the same thing, but this time keep the pedal
down for five or six seconds. This clears the extra
gasoline from the engine.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer. If you do not, your engine
might not perform properly.
Starter Interlock Feature
Engine Coolant Heater
For your convenience and to avoid damage to your
starter, your vehicle is equipped with a starter interlock
feature. This feature will not allow you to crank the
engine while the vehicle is already running.
The engine coolant heater is located on the driver’s side
of the engine under the manifold.
Racing or Other Competitive Driving
See your warranty book before using your vehicle
for racing or other competitive driving.
Notice: If you use your vehicle for racing or other
competitive driving, the engine may use more
oil than it would with normal use. Low oil levels can
damage the engine. Be sure to check the oil level
often during racing or other competitive driving and
keep the level at or near 1 quart (1 L) above the
upper mark that shows the proper operating range
on the engine oil dipstick. For information on
how to add oil, see Engine Oil on page 5-13.
After the competitive driving, remove excess oil so
that the level on the dipstick is not above the
upper mark that shows the proper operating range.
In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder, the engine
coolant heater can help. You will get easier starting
and better fuel economy during engine warm-up.
Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a
minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle.
At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant
heater is not required.
2-23
To Use The Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The electrical cord is attached to the generator
bracket assembly, between the generator and the
windshield washer fluid tank. With the headlamps
closed, route the cord in the opening between
the headlamp door and the fender panel on
the driver’s side of the vehicle. Do not pinch the
cord when closing the hood.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
{CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will
not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
2-24
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not it could be
damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you will be parking
your vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice
for that particular area.
Automatic Transmission Operation
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle will not move, even when you are on
fairly level ground, always set your parking
brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P).
See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-32.
There are several different positions for your shift lever.
PARK (P): This position locks your rear wheels. It is
the best position to use when you start your engine
because your vehicle cannot move easily.
Be sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before
starting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control system.
2-25
You have to fully apply your regular brakes before you
can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition key is in
ON. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure
on the shift lever – push the shift lever all the way
into PARK (P) and release the shift lever button as you
maintain brake application. Then press the shift lever
button and move the shift lever into the gear you wish. If
you do not apply the brake after 15 seconds once the
ignition is turned on, you will receive a PRESS BRAKE
BEFORE SHIFT message in the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See Shifting Out of Park (P) on page 2-34.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transmission,
see If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on
page 4-32.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
Notice: Shifting our of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
with the engine racing may damage the
transmission. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Be sure the engine is not racing
when shifting your vehicle.
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (X): This position is for
normal driving.
2-26
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving.
However, it offers more power and lower fuel economy
than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (X).
Here are some times you might choose THIRD (3)
instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (X):
• When driving on hilly, winding roads.
• When going down a steep hill.
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but
lower fuel economy than THIRD (3). You can use
SECOND (2) on hills. It can help control your speed as
you go down steep mountain roads, but then you
would also want to use your brakes off and on.
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power,
but lower fuel economy, than SECOND (2). You can use
it on very steep hills, in deep snow or mud. If the shift
lever is put in FIRST (1), the transmission will not
shift into first gear until the vehicle is going slowly
enough.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transmission. If you are
stuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
Maximum engine speed is limited to protect driveline
components from improper operation.
If you manually select SECOND (2) when you start the
vehicle, the transmission will drive (and stay) in
second gear. You may use this feature for reducing
torque to the rear wheels when you are trying to start
your vehicle from a stop on slippery road surfaces, or for
preventing the transmission from downshifting into
FIRST (1) in situations where a downshift would
be undesirable.
2-27
Manual Transmission Operation
This is the shift pattern for
the six-speed manual
transmission.
THIRD (3), FOURTH (4), FIFTH (5) and SIXTH (6):
Shift into THIRD (3), FOURTH (4), FIFTH (5) and
SIXTH (6) the same way you do for SECOND (2).
Slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the
accelerator pedal.
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the
brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press
the clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift to
NEUTRAL.
NEUTRAL: Use this position when you start or idle
your engine. Your shift lever is in NEUTRAL when it is
centered in the shift pattern, not in any gear.
Here is how to operate your transmission:
FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift into
FIRST (1). Then slowly let up on the clutch pedal as
you press the accelerator pedal.
You can shift into FIRST (1) when you are going less
than 40 mph (64 km/h). If you come to a complete stop
and it i hard to shift into FIRST (1), put the shift lever
in NEUTRAL and let up on the clutch. Press the clutch
pedal back down. Then shift into FIRST (1).
SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you let up on
the accelerator pedal and shift into SECOND (2).
Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the
accelerator pedal.
2-28
REVERSE (R): To back up, press down the clutch
pedal and shift into REVERSE (R). Just apply pressure
to get the lever past FIFTH (5) and SIXTH (6) into
REVERSE (R). Let up on the clutch pedal slowly while
pressing the accelerator pedal.
Your six-speed manual transmission has a feature that
allows you to safely shift into REVERSE (R) while the
vehicle is rolling (at less than 3 mph (5 km/h)). You will be
locked out if you try to shift into REVERSE (R) while your
vehicle is moving faster than 3 mph (5 km/h). If you have
turned your ignition off and wish to park your vehicle in
REVERSE (R), you will have to move the shift lever
quickly to the right, and immediately forward into gear.
Shift Speeds (Manual Transmission)
{CAUTION:
If you skip a gear when you downshift, you
could lose control of your vehicle. You could
injure yourself or others. Don’t shift down
more than one gear at a time when you
downshift.
This chart shows when to shift to the next higher gear
for the best fuel economy.
Manual Transmission Recommended
Shift Speeds in mph (km/h)
Engine
All
Engines
Acceleration Shift Speed
1 to 2
2 to 3
3 to 4
4 to 5
5 to 6
15 (24) 25 (40) 40 (64) 45 (72) 50 (80)
If your engine speed drops below 900 rpm, or if the
engine is not running smoothly, you should downshift to
the next lower gear. You may have to downshift two
or more gears to keep the engine running smoothly or
for good engine performance.
Notice: When shifting gears, do not move the shift
lever around unnecessarily. This may damage
the transmission. Shift directly into the next gear.
2-29
One to Four Shift Light
(Manual Transmission)
When this light comes on,
you can only shift from
FIRST (1) to FOURTH (4)
instead of FIRST (1) to
SECOND (2).
You must complete the shift into FOURTH (4) to turn off
this feature. This helps you get the best possible fuel
economy.
After shifting to FOURTH (4), you may downshift to a
lower gear if you prefer.
Notice: Forcing the shift lever into any gear except
FOURTH (4) when the 1 TO 4 SHIFT light comes
on may damage the transmission. Shift only from
FIRST (1) to FOURTH (4) when the light comes on.
This light will come on when:
• The engine coolant temperature is higher than
169°F (76°C),
• you are going 15 to 19 mph (24 to 31 km/h) and
• you are 21 percent throttle or less.
2-30
Downshifting (Manual Transmission)
If your vehicle is a coupe or convertible, do not downshift
into the gear shown below at a speed greater than
shown in the table:
FIRST (1)
50 mph (80 km/h)
SECOND (2)
74 mph (119 km/h)
THIRD (3)
101 mph (163 km/h)
FOURTH (4)
130 mph (209 km/h)
If your vehicle is a Z06, do not downshift into a gear
shown below at a speed greater than shown in the table:
FIRST (1)
48 mph (77 km/h)
SECOND (2)
69 mph (111 km/h)
THIRD (3)
100 mph (161 km/h)
FOURTH (4)
143 mph (230 km/h)
Notice: If you skip more than one gear when you
downshift, or if you race the engine when you
release the clutch pedal while downshifting, you
could damage the engine, clutch, driveshaft or the
transmission. Do not skip gears or race the
engine when downshifting.
Parking Brake
The six-speed transmission has a spring that centers
the shift lever near THIRD (3) and FOURTH (4).
This spring helps you know which gear you are in
when you are shifting. Be careful when shifting from
FIRST (1) to SECOND (2) or downshifting from
SIXTH (6) to FIFTH (5). The spring will try to pull the
shift lever toward FOURTH (4) and THIRD (3).
Make sure you move the lever into SECOND (2) or
FIFTH (5). If you let the shift lever move in the direction
of the pulling, you may end up shifting from FIRST (1)
to FOURTH (4) or from SIXTH (6) to THIRD (3).
To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down.
Pull the parking brake lever up. If the ignition is on,
the brake system warning light will come on.
2-31
Shifting Into Park (P)
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will
not move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, use the steps that follow.
To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal
down. Then push the release button in as you move the
parking brake lever all the way down.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Verify that
the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
2-32
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake.
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running (Automatic Transmission)
{CAUTION:
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by holding in the
button on the lever and pushing the lever all the
way toward the front of the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition key to OFF.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
remove the key from the ignition, the vehicle is in
PARK (P).
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you
have moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold down
the regular brake pedal. See if you can move the
shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling it
toward you. If you can, it means that the shift lever was
not fully locked into PARK (P).
2-33
Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission)
Shifting Out of Park (P)
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl
in the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque
lock.” To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and
then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave
the driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting
Into PARK (P)” listed previously in this section.
Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock
control system which locks the shift lever in PARK (P)
when the ignition is in the off position. In addition,
you have to fully apply your regular brake before you
can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition is in ON.
See Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2-25.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the transmission parking pawl, so you can
pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
2-34
As a reminder, you will see a message in the Driver
Information Center (DIC) that will say PRESS BRAKE
BEFORE SHIFT within 15 seconds unless the brake
is pressed.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way
into PARK (P) and release the shift lever button as you
maintain brake application. Then press the shift lever
button and move the shift lever into the gear you wish.
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t shift
out of PARK (P), try this:
Parking Over Things That Burn
1. Turn the key to ACCESSORY.
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.
3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the engine and then shift to the drive gear
you want.
5. Have the system fixed as soon as possible.
Parking Your Vehicle
(Manual Transmission)
Before you get out of your vehicle, move the shift lever
into REVERSE (R) and firmly apply the parking
brake. Once the shift lever has been placed into
REVERSE (R) with the clutch pedal pressed in, you can
turn the ignition key to OFF, remove the key and
release the clutch.
{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass or other
things that can burn.
2-35
Engine Exhaust
Running Your Engine While You Are
Parked (Automatic Transmission)
{CAUTION:
It’s better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you can not see
or smell. It can cause unconsciousness and
death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• Your exhaust system sounds strange or
different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
2-36
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier Caution under
Engine Exhaust on page 2-36.
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
See Winter Driving on page 4-28.
Mirrors
{CAUTION:
Manual Rearview Mirror
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move, even
when you are on fairly level ground, always set
your parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P).
An inside rearview mirror is attached above the
windshield. The mirror pivots so that you can adjust it.
You can adjust the mirror for day or night driving.
Pull the tab for night driving to reduce glare. Push the
tab forward for daytime driving.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’t
move. See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-32.
2-37
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
Your vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearview
mirror with map lamps.
This mirror automatically changes to reduce glare from
headlamps behind you. A time delay feature prevents
rapid changing from the day to night positions while
driving under lights and through traffic.
IO (On/Off): The automatic dimming feature is turned
on or off by pressing this button located on the
lower part of the mirror. Press and hold the button for
up to three seconds to turn this feature on or off.
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror housing.
Outside Power Heated Mirrors
The mirror includes two map lamps and an automatic
dimming function. There is also an interior console flood
lamp located underneath the rearview mirror which
remains on at all times.
The power mirror control is on the driver’s door.
It controls the driver’s and passenger’s mirrors.
2-38
To adjust either mirror, press the LT (left) or RT (right)
button to select the mirror, then press the arrows to adjust
the direction of the mirror. The mirror will stay selected for
20 seconds after the last adjustment. An indicator light
will come on above the mirror that you select.
Your preferred mirror position can be stored if you have
the memory option. See Memory on page 2-57.
For operation of the heated outside mirrors, see Dual
Automatic Climate Control System on page 3-23.
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror
If your vehicle has this feature, the driver’s side
outside mirror will adjust for the glare of headlamps
behind you. This feature is controlled by the on and off
setting on the inside mirror. See Automatic Dimming
Rearview Mirror on page 2-38.
Outside Convex Mirror
Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from the
driver’s seat.
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
2-39
Storage Areas
Center Console Storage Area
Glove Box
To open the glove box, lift up on the lever. Use your
door key to lock or unlock it. The glove box has a light
inside.
Cupholder(s)
The cupholder is located on the center console in front
of the ashtray. To open it, place your thumb on the
left side of the lid and push down. Raise the right side
with your index finger.
To use this storage area, pull up the lid on the driver’s
side front edge of the console and swing it to the
passenger’s side.
2-40
You can use the key to lock and unlock the console.
Do not leave the key in the lock, or it could be damaged
when the driver sits down.
The fuel filler door release button and accessory power
outlet are located inside the center console.
Floor Mats
How to Remove and Replace the
Floor Mats
To remove the floor mats,
pull up on the rear of the
mat to disconnect from
the locator hooks.
The floor mats are specially designed to remain in
position under your feet and out of reach of the
accelerator pedal. The driver’s side floor mat is held
in place by two locator hooks and the passenger’s side
is held in place by one.
Be sure that the driver’s side floor mat is properly
placed on the floor so that it does not block the
movement of the accelerator pedal.
To reinstall the floor mats, line up the openings in the
floor mat over the locator hooks and push down
into place.
2-41
Rear Storage Area
There are three rear storage compartments in the floor
of the rear hatch/trunk area.
Coupe shown, Convertible and Z06 similar
If you have a coupe or convertible model, your vehicle
will be equipped with three storage compartment
lids. If you have a Z06, your vehicle’s three storage
compartments will not have lids.
To access a storage compartment, pull up on the latch to
release the lid. Remove the storage compartment lid.
When replacing a storage compartment lid, make sure
the latch is in the correct location so the latch locks
securely into place.
Notice: Placing heavy objects, which may shift or
slide while driving, in the center storage area
could damage your CD changer. If your vehicle has
the optional CD changer, do not put heavy objects
in the center storage area.
Notice: Do not store heavy or sharp objects in the
rear storage compartments located in the
hatch/trunk area. If you do, the objects could
damage the underbody.
2-42
Convenience Net
Cargo Cover
If your vehicle has this feature you will see it on the
back wall of the rear area of the vehicle.
If your vehicle has this feature, the security shade can
provide hidden storage in the rear area of the vehicle.
The shade is also helpful in blocking the glare from the
removable roof when it is stored in the rear compartment.
Put small loads, like grocery bags, in the net. It can
help keep them from falling over during sharp turns or
quick starts and stops. The convenience net is not
for larger, heavier loads.
You can unhook the net and place it in one of the rear
storage compartments when you are not using it.
On coupe models only, a plastic storage bag has also
been provided.
Using the Cargo Cover
1. Hook the elastic loops
on the front corners (A)
of the shade to the
T-nuts located on the
front corners of the
rear hatch frame.
2. Hook the elastic loops on the rear corners (B) of the
shade to the hooks recessed inside the rear hatch
frame, near the rear corners.
2-43
Roof Panel
Until you are sure you can remove the panel alone,
have someone help you.
Your vehicle may have a removable roof panel.
Notice: If you drop or rest a roof panel on its
edges, the roof panel, paint and/or weatherstripping
may be damaged. Always place the roof panel in
the stowage receivers after removing it from
the vehicle.
Removing the Roof Panel
{CAUTION:
Do not try to remove a roof panel while the
vehicle is moving. Trying to remove the roof
panel while the vehicle is moving could cause
an accident. The panel could fall into the
vehicle and cause you to lose control, or it
could fly off and strike another vehicle. You or
others could be injured. Remove the roof panel
only when the vehicle is parked.
2-44
1. Park on a level surface, set the parking brake firmly
and shift an automatic transmission into PARK (P).
Shift a manual transmission into REVERSE (R).
2. Turn the ignition key to OFF. Lower both sun visors
and turn them toward the door glass.
3. Open the rear hatch and remove any items that
may interfere with proper storage of the roof
panel.
4. Make sure to install the two egg-shaped stowage
receivers into the floor of the rear storage
compartment. Secure both receivers into their
proper positions by turning them counterclockwise.
There are two latches on the front of the roof panel
near each door (A), and one rear latch (B).
5. Lower the windows and open the doors.
2-45
6. To unlock the front of the roof panel, pull down
each of the front handles. Grasp the handles
with your fingers and pull each toward you.
Complete a 180° turn toward the center of the
vehicle. Then push up on each of the handles.
2-46
7. To unlock the rear of the roof panel, press the latch
release button with your thumb and pull down the
latch lever with your fingers.
8. After releasing the latches, return the sun visors to
the forward position.
Storing the Roof Panel
{CAUTION:
If a roof panel is not stored properly, it could
be thrown about the vehicle in a crash or
sudden maneuver. People in the vehicle could
be injured. Whenever you store a roof panel in
the vehicle, always be sure that it is stored
securely in the proper location.
9. Stand on one side of the vehicle and, if necessary,
have your helper stand on the other side. Together,
carefully lift the front edge of the panel up and
forward, and out of the vehicle opening.
10. When the panel is loosened from the vehicle, one
person should grasp the roof panel as close to the
center of the vehicle as possible and lift away
the panel.
Notice: If you drop or rest a roof panel on its
edges, the roof panel, paint and/or weatherstripping
may be damaged. Always place the roof panel in
the stowage receivers after removing it from
the vehicle.
1. Turn the roof panel so that the rear edge of the
panel is facing the storage area. The locating
pins (at the rear of the panel) should point toward
the egg-shaped stowage receivers on the floor
of the center compartment.
2. Push the panel forward until the pins bottom out in
the receivers.
2-47
3. There are two spring-loaded storage pins on the
rear wall of the storage compartment (A). These
storage pins go into the slots on each side of
the roof panel (B).
4. Gently lower the roof panel onto the carpeted
ledge. Then, pull each release rearward and upward
to place the storage pins into the holes of the
roof panel.
5. Gently lift and lower the roof panel to be sure it is
locked into place.
2-48
Installing the Roof Panel
{CAUTION:
An improperly attached roof panel may fall into
or fly off the vehicle. You or others could be
injured. After installing the roof panel, always
check that it is firmly attached by pushing up on
the underside of the panel. Check now and then
to be sure the roof panel is firmly in place.
Notice: If you drop or rest a roof panel on its
edges, the roof panel, paint and/or weatherstripping
may be damaged. Always place the roof panel in
the stowage receivers after removing it from
the vehicle.
In most cases, it is easier to install the removable roof
with two people rather than one.
1. Check to be sure that the front handles and rear
latch on the ceiling are in their opened positions
before attempting to install the roof panel.
2. If the roof panel is stored in the rear area, grasp it
with your right hand at the middle edge near the
seatbacks, and with your left hand at the middle of
the edge closest to you. Reverse the steps
described previously under Storing the Roof Panel
on page 2-47.
3. Remove the roof panel from the storage
compartment.
4. Place the roof panel over the vehicle.
2-49
6. Turn the front handles toward the side doors to the
closed position.
7. Hook the rear latch by pushing the lever up to the
locked position.
8. Grasp and tug the roof panel up and down and
side-to-side to make sure the roof panel is
securely installed.
Convertible Top
If your vehicle has this feature, the following procedures
explain the proper operation of the convertible top.
5. Position the rear edge of the roof panel to the
weatherstrip on the back of the roof opening (A).
Then align the pins at the rear of the roof panel
weatherstrip with the receiving cup in the body
weatherstrip (B). Gently lower the front edge of the
roof panel to the front of the body opening (C).
2-50
Notice: Some automatic car washes may cause
damage to your vehicle. To avoid possible damage,
use touchless automatic car washes.
For care and cleaning of the convertible top, see
“Cleaning Your Convertible Top” under Cleaning the
Outside of Your Vehicle on page 5-85.
When lowering and raising the convertible top, you will
use the following:
Lowering the Convertible Top
Notice: Leaving the convertible top down and
exposing the interior of your vehicle to outdoor
conditions may cause damage. Always close
the convertible top if leaving your vehicle outdoors.
1. Set the parking brake firmly. Shift an automatic
transmission into PARK (P). Shift a manual
transmission into REVERSE (R).
2. Turn the ignition key to OFF. Lower both sun visors
and turn them toward the door glass.
Notice: Lowering the convertible top when there
are objects in the storage area could damage
it or break the glass rear window. Always verify that
no objects are in the storage area before lowering
the convertible top.
A. Front Edge of the Convertible Top
B. Rear Edge of the Convertible Top
C. Storage Compartment Lid
2-51
3. Unlock the front of the convertible top by lowering
the latch handles and turning them inward. Push
the latch handles back to the up position.
2-52
4. Lift upward on the front edge (A) of the convertible
top off of the windshield frame. Then lift upward on
the rear edge (B) of the convertible top to be
vertical off the storage compartment lid (C). The
front edge (A) and rear edge (B) should be straight
up and down.
If the vehicle has lost battery power, you can still
open the storage compartment lid (C) using
the manual release cable.
5. Tilt the driver’s seatback forward and press the
storage compartment release button located on
the underside of the storage compartment lid (C)
behind the driver’s seat. Then raise the storage
compartment lid (C). While attempting to raise the
lid, if the lid does not release and you hear
three chimes, check to make sure the trunk lid is
closed. Also, the lid will not release if the alarm
is turned on or the trunk lid is open.
After pressing the release button, the driver’s and
passenger’s door glass should retract to the
full-down position.
The cable is located underneath the carpeting
behind the driver’s and passenger’s seats, in the
center of the vehicle. When using the manual
release, you must first open the doors to prevent
damage to the seals. To access the cable, lift
and pull back the carpeting. Then pull the cable to
release the storage compartment lid if needed.
2-53
Notice: If you lower the convertible top into the
storage compartment and the rear edge of the top is
not in the full-down position, you could damage
the top. Always verify that the rear edge of the
convertible top is in the full-down position before
lowering the top into the storage compartment.
7. Then move the top rearward to its fully-stored
position.
8. After the top is stored, apply one even push on the
center of the front edge (A) of the convertible top to
assure that the top is fully retracted.
6. Push forward on the front edge (A) of the
convertible top to allow the rear edge (B) of the
convertible top to be moved to its full-down position.
2-54
9. Close the storage compartment lid (C) by closing
with a swift, firm motion.
Raising the Convertible Top
1. Park on a level surface, set the parking brake firmly
and shift an automatic transmission into PARK (P).
Shift a manual transmission into REVERSE (R).
Lower both windows and sun visors and turn
the ignition key to OFF.
2. Tilt the driver’s seat forward and press the storage
compartment release button, or use the manual
release cable if battery power has been lost. Lift the
storage compartment lid (C).
After pressing the release button, the driver and
passenger door glass should retract to the full-down
position, if they have not already been lowered.
3. Pull the top up by firmly gripping the front edge (A)
of the convertible top with your hand and applying a
brisk, firm upward and forward motion to get the
top in the full-up position.
2-55
6. Lower the rear edge (B) of the convertible top by
first slightly pushing the front edge (A) of the
convertible top forward.
7. Push the front edge (A) of the convertible top down
from the outside of the vehicle, or pull the front
edge (A) of the convertible top down from the
center pull-down handle located in the inside of
the vehicle.
8. Turn the latches outward to secure the top in the
up position.
4. Lift the rear edge (B) of the convertible top to its
full-up position by first raising the front edge (A).
5. Close the storage compartment lid (C) by closing
with a swift, firm motion.
2-56
Vehicle Personalization
Memory
The MEMORY buttons are located on the driver’s door,
above the power mirror controls. The MEMORY
buttons can store and recall settings for up to three
drivers. Use button 1 to store the settings for the first
driver, button 2 for a second driver or press buttons
1 and 2 at the same time for a third driver. To store your
memory settings, do the following:
1. Adjust your settings for the driver’s seat position,
outside rearview mirror positions, and telescopic
steering wheel (if equipped).
2. Press and hold a MEMORY button. The light above
the MEMORY button will glow steady for one
second and then flash once when the settings are
complete. Then the light will go off.
3. Set the climate control temperature, fan speed and
mode settings, radio presets, tone, volume,
playback mode (AM/FM, tape or CD), tape direction
and compact disc position.
If your vehicle has this feature, MEMORY can store and
recall the settings for the driver’s seat position, the
outside rearview mirror positions, telescopic steering
column (if equipped), radio presets, tone, volume,
playback mode (AM/FM, tape or CD), last displayed
station, compact disc position and tape direction and the
last climate control setting.
2-57
Your memory settings are now programmed. Any
changes that are made to the audio system and climate
controls while driving will be automatically stored
when the ignition key is turned off.
Drivers 1, 2 and 3 correspond to the order in which your
remote keyless entry transmitters were programmed.
See Remote Keyless Entry System on page 2-5
for more information.
When first entering your vehicle, after pressing the
unlock button on your remote keyless entry transmitter
or a MEMORY button, a recall of your settings will
occur when the door is closed and the ignition key is
in the ignition switch. As the memory settings are
recalled, the light above the button will flash until the
correct settings are achieved, then glow for five seconds
when complete.
Memory recall will not work if the vehicle is moving.
Memory recall will be temporarily interrupted during
engine crank.
A memory recall can be stopped by pressing any
memory seat, mirror or steering column position button.
2-58
If easy entry is on, you must press the MEMORY button
to reset the seat.
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-2
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-4
Other Warning Devices ...................................3-5
Horn .............................................................3-5
Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-5
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-6
Exterior Lamps .............................................3-13
Interior Lamps ..............................................3-17
Head-Up Display (HUD) .................................3-18
Accessory Power Outlets ...............................3-22
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter ........................3-23
Climate Controls ............................................3-23
Dual Automatic Climate Control System ...........3-23
Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-31
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators .............3-32
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators .............3-32
Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-33
Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-34
Tachometer .................................................3-34
Safety Belt Reminder Light .............................3-34
Air Bag Readiness Light ................................3-35
Air Bag Off Light ..........................................3-36
Voltmeter Gage ............................................3-37
Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-38
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light .............3-39
Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light ......3-39
Active Handling System Light .........................3-40
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-41
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-41
Engine Oil Pressure Gage .............................3-44
Security Light ...............................................3-45
Check Gages Warning Light ...........................3-46
Fuel Gage ...................................................3-46
Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-48
DIC Controls and Displays .............................3-49
DIC Warnings and Messages .........................3-58
Other Messages ...........................................3-68
Audio System(s) .............................................3-69
Setting the Time ...........................................3-69
Radio with Cassette ......................................3-70
Radio with CD ..............................................3-76
Trunk-Mounted CD Changer ...........................3-81
Theft-Deterrent Feature ..................................3-86
Radio Reception ...........................................3-88
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player .................3-88
Care of Your CDs .........................................3-89
Care of Your CD Player ................................3-89
Fixed Mast Antenna (Z06) ..............................3-89
Power Antenna Mast Care (Convertible) ...........3-90
Integrated Windshield and Rear Window
Antennas (Coupe) .....................................3-90
3-1
Instrument Panel Overview
3-2
The main components of your instrument panel are the following:
A. Instrument Panel Brightness Control. See “Instrument
Panel Brightness” under Interior Lamps on page 3-17.
B. Head-Up Display Controls. See Head-Up Display
(HUD) on page 3-18.
C. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-6.
D. Driver Information Center (DIC). See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on page 3-48.
E. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel
Cluster on page 3-33.
F. Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever. See “Windshield
Wipers” under Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
on page 3-6.
G. Driver Information Center (DIC) Controls.
See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-48.
H. Hazard Warning Flasher Button. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 3-4.
I. Center Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on
page 3-31.
J. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on page 3-69.
K. Climate Controls. See Dual Automatic Climate
Control System on page 3-23.
L. Fog Lamp Button. See “Fog Lamps” under Exterior
Lamps on page 3-13.
M. Hatch/Trunk Release Button. See “Hatch/Trunk Lid
Release” under Hatch/Trunk on page 2-11.
N. Ignition Switch. See Ignition Positions on page 2-20.
O. Shift Lever (Automatic Shown). See Automatic
Transmission Operation on page 2-25 or Manual
Transmission Operation on page 2-28.
P. Active Handling Button. See Active Handling System
on page 4-10.
Q. Accessory Power Outlet. See Accessory Power
Outlets on page 3-22.
R. Selective Ride Control Switch. See Selective Ride
Control on page 4-12.
S. Air Bag Off Light. See Air Bag Off Light on page 3-36.
T. Instrument Panel Cupholder. See Cupholder(s) on
page 2-40.
U. Fuel Door Release Button. See Filling Your Tank
on page 5-7.
V. Ashtray and Cigarette Lighter. See Ashtrays and
Cigarette Lighter on page 3-23.
W. Parking Brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-31.
X. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-40.
Y. Instrument Panel Fuse Block. See “Instrument Panel
Fuse Block” under Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
page 5-93.
Z. Air Bag Off Switch. See Air Bag Off Switch on
page 1-46.
3-3
Hazard Warning Flashers
The hazard warning
flasher button is located
on the instrument
panel above the audio
system.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key isn’t in the
ignition.
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front
and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
3-4
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
turn the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals won’t work.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
Horn
To sound the horn, press either horn symbol on the
steering wheel.
Tilt Wheel
A tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel
before you drive. You can raise it to the highest level
to give your legs more room when you exit and enter the
vehicle.
The lever that allows you to tilt the steering wheel is
located on the left side of the steering column.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the
lever toward you. Then move the wheel to a comfortable
position and release the lever to lock the wheel in place.
3-5
Telescopic Steering Column
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
If your vehicle has this feature, the telescopic steering
column will allow you to adjust the distance the steering
wheel is from the instrument panel.
The telescopic steering
column switch is located
on the right side of
the steering column.
To operate the telescopic steering column, push the
switch forward and the wheel will move away from you.
Pull the switch rearward and the wheel will move
toward you.
The telescopic steering column position can be stored
with your memory settings. See Memory on page 2-57
for more information.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
•
•
•
•
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Flash-to-Pass Feature
Cruise Control
For information on exterior lamps, see Exterior Lamps
on page 3-13.
3-6
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two
downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you
to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the multifunction lever all the
way up or down. When the turn is finished, the lever
will return automatically.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
turn or lane change.
If you signal a turn or a lane change and the arrows flash
faster than normal, a signal bulb may be burned out.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows do not go on at all when you
signal a turn, check the fuses and check for burned-out
bulbs. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-93.
Turn Signal on Chime
A chime will remind you if you leave the turn signal on
for more than 3/4 mile (1.2 km) of driving.
If you need to leave the turn signal on for more than
3/4 mile (1.2 km), turn off the signal and then turn it
back on.
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by itself
when you release it.
3-7
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Windshield Wipers
To change the headlamps from low beam to high or high
to low, push the turn signal lever all the way forward.
While the high beams
are on, this light on the
instrument panel cluster
also will be on. To change
the headlamps from high to
low, pull the lever rearward.
Headlamps on Reminder
If you turn the ignition off and leave the headlamps or
parking lamps on and open a door, you will hear a chime
reminding you to turn off the lamps.
Flash-to-Pass
To use the flash-to-pass feature, momentarily pull the
turn signal lever toward you. The high-beam indicator
will flash to indicate to the other driver that you intend to
pass. If the low-beam headlamps are off and you
have the optional fog lamps on, the fog lamps will flash.
3-8
Use this lever located on the right side of the steering
column to operate the windshield wipers.
OFF: Move the lever to OFF to turn off the windshield
wipers.
INT (Intermittent): Move the lever to INT to choose a
delayed wiping cycle. Turn the INT ADJ band down
for a longer delay or up for a shorter delay. The further
the INT ADJ band is turned upward, the shorter the
delay will be and the further the INT ADJ band is
turned downward, the longer the delay will be.
The wiper speed can only be adjusted when the lever
is in the INT position. Use this position for light rain
or snow.
LO (Low Speed): Move the lever up to the first setting
past INT, for steady wiping at low speed.
HI (High Speed): Move the lever up to the second
setting past INT, for steady wiping at high speed.
MIST: Move the lever all the way down to MIST for a
single wiping cycle. Hold it there until the windshield
wipers start; then let go. The windshield wipers will
stop after one wipe. If you want more wipes, hold the
band on MIST longer.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wipers. If this
occurs, a circuit breaker will stop the wipers until the
motor cools. So, be sure to clear any ice and snow from
the windshield wiper blades before using them. If the
wiper blades are frozen to the windshield, carefully
loosen them or warm the windshield before turning
the wipers on. If your blades do become worn or
damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
Windshield Washer
The lever on the right side of the steering column also
controls the windshield washer. There is a button at
the end of the lever. To spray washer fluid on the
windshield, press the button and hold it. The washer will
spray until you release the button. The wipers will
continue to clear the window for about six seconds after
the button is released and then stop or return to your
preset speed.
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
If the fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir is low,
the message LOW WASHER FLUID will appear on the
Driver Information Center (DIC) display. It will take
60 seconds after the bottle is refilled for this message to
turn off. For information on the correct washer fluid to
use, see Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-36 and
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11.
3-9
Cruise Control
The cruise set speed and the speedometer indicated
speed may not always be exactly the same. When you
apply the brakes or push the clutch pedal, the cruise
control disengages. The DIC will show CRUISE
DISENGAGED. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 3-58.
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you can
not drive safely at a steady speed. So, do not
use your cruise control on winding roads or in
heavy traffic.
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can really help on long
trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below
about 25 mph (40 km/h).
When using cruise control, the accelerator pedal will
return to its fully-released position and will not
move while cruise control is engaged.
The Driver Information Center (DIC) will display the
cruise set speed in a digital number. For example,
the DIC will say CRUISE SET 60 mph (97 km/h).
3-10
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause needless wheel spinning,
and you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the Traction
Control System begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise
control will automatically disengage. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 4-9. When road conditions allow
you to safely use it again, you may turn the cruise control
back on.
Setting Cruise Control
{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set the cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake or clutch pedal. This,
of course, disengages the cruise control. But you do not
need to reset it.
Once you are going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more,
you can move the cruise control switch to R/A
(Resume/Accelerate) briefly. The Driver Information
Center (DIC) will display the cruise set speed.
You will go right back up to your chosen speed and
stay there.
1. Move the cruise control switch to ON.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Press the SET button at the end of the lever and
release it. The cruise set speed will be displayed
by the Driver Information Center (DIC).
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. The pedal
will return to an idle position.
3-11
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
There are two ways to reduce speed while using cruise
control:
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. The speed will not begin to increase
until sufficient pedal travel is achieved. Press the
SET button at the end of the lever, then release the
button and the accelerator pedal. You will now
cruise at the higher speed.
• Move the cruise switch to R/A. Hold it there until
you get up to the speed you want, then release
the switch. (To increase your speed in very small
amounts, move the switch to R/A briefly, then
release it. Each time you do this, the vehicle will go
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.)
The Driver Information Center (DIC) will display the
cruise set speed.
3-12
• Press in the SET button at the end of the lever
until you reach the lower speed you want, then
release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, press the
SET button briefly. Each time you do this,
you will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
The Driver Information Center (DIC) will display the
cruise set speed.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, the vehicle will
slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
Exterior Lamps
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the
hills. When going downhill, you may have to brake
or shift to a lower gear to keep your speed down.
Of course, applying the brake takes you out of cruise
control. Many drivers find this to be too much trouble
and do not use cruise control on steep hills.
The exterior lamp switch on the turn signal/multifunction
lever operates the headlamps.
Ending Cruise Control
; (Parking Lamps):
There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:
• Step lightly on the brake pedal or push the clutch
pedal, if you have a manual transmission vehicle.
• Move the cruise switch to OFF.
The Driver Information Center (DIC) will display the
message CRUISE DISENGAGED.
Erasing Speed Memory
The exterior lamp switch has three positions:
OFF: Turn the switch to this position to turn off all
lamps, except the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL).
Turn the switch to this position
to turn on the parking lamps, together with the
following:
• Taillamps
• Parking Lamps
• Sidemarker Lamps
3 (Headlamps): Turn the switch to this position to
turn on the headlamps, together with the previously
listed lamps.
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,
cruise control set speed memory is erased.
3-13
Headlamps Doors
You can open the doors manually using the knob
next to the headlamp assembly. Turn the knob
counterclockwise until the doors are open. Turn the
knob clockwise to close the doors manually.
The headlamp doors should be open when driving in icy
or snowy conditions to prevent the doors from freezing
closed and when washing the vehicle to help clean
the headlamps.
Notice: If the hood comes into contact with the
headlamp doors when you raise the hood, you could
damage the hood and/or the headlamp doors.
Always close the headlamp doors before opening
the hood.
The headlamp doors are designed to open when you
turn the headlamps on, and close when you turn
the headlamps and parking lamps off. If you turn the
headlamps on, then turn back to the parking lamps
setting, the headlamp doors will stay open.
3-14
Daytime Running Lamps
Fog Lamps
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short
periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional
daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
The DRL system will make the front turn signal lamps
come on when the following conditions are met:
• The ignition is on,
• the exterior lamp switch is off and
• the parking brake is released.
When the DRL are on, only the front turn signal lamps
will be on. The headlamps, taillamps, sidemarker
and other lamps will not be on. Your instrument panel
will not be lit up either.
To idle the vehicle with the DRL off, set the parking
brake while the ignition is in OFF. Then start the vehicle.
The DRL, headlamps and parking lamps will stay off
until you release the parking brake.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
Your vehicle may have this feature. Use the fog lamps
for better vision in foggy or misty conditions. Your
parking lamps or low-beam headlamps must be on or
the fog lamps will not work.
To turn the fog lamps on, press the button located on
the instrument panel, to the left of the steering column.
A light in the button will come on while the fog lamps
are on. Press the button again to turn the fog lamps off.
3-15
Twilight Sentinel® (Optional in
United States, Standard in Canada)
Make sure your instrument panel brightness control is in
full bright position. See “Instrument Panel Brightness
Control” under Interior Lamps on page 3-17.
Twilight Sentinel® can turn your lamps on and off for you.
A light sensor on top of the instrument panel makes the
Twilight Sentinel® work, so be sure it is not covered.
With Twilight Sentinel® turned on, you can idle the
vehicle with the lamps off, even when it is dark outside.
First set the parking brake while the ignition is in OFF.
Then start the vehicle. The lamps will stay off until
you release the parking brake.
You can customize your vehicle to turn Twilight
Sentinel® on or off, except for vehicles first sold in
Canada. See Driver Information Center (DIC) on
page 3-48 to turn this feature on or off.
When Twilight Sentinel® is turned on, you will see the
following happen:
• When it is dark enough outside, the front turn signal
lamps (DRL) will go off, and the headlamps and
parking lamps will come on. The other lamps
that come on with headlamps will also come on.
• When it is bright enough outside, the headlamps
will go off, and the front turn signal lamps (DRL)
will come on, as long as the exterior lamp switch is
in the OFF position.
If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system will come on immediately. Once you
leave the garage, it will take about one minute for
the automatic headlamp system to change to DRL if
it is light outside. During that delay, your instrument
panel cluster may not be as bright as usual.
3-16
Twilight Sentinel® also provides exterior illumination as
you leave the vehicle. If Twilight Sentinel® has turned
on the lamps when you turn off the ignition, your lamps
will remain on until:
• The exterior lamp switch is moved from OFF to the
parking lamp position, or
• a delay time that you select has elapsed.
See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-48 to
select the delay time that you want. You can also select
no delay time.
If you turn off the ignition with the exterior lamp switch
in the parking lamp or headlamp position, the Twilight
Sentinel® delay will not occur. The lamps will turn off as
soon as the switch is turned off.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
Parade Mode
Interior Lamps
Instrument Panel Brightness
The knob for this feature is
located on the left side of
the instrument panel.
The instrument panel brightness knob has an added
feature called parade mode to assist you in seeing
certain instrument panel controls if your headlamps are
on in the daylight. Turn the knob counterclockwise to
dim the instrument panel lights or clockwise to brighten
the lights. This will occur only with the parking lamps
or headlamps on.
Courtesy Lamps
When any door or the hatch/trunk lid is opened, the
interior lamps will go on unless it is bright outside.
You can also turn on the courtesy lamps by turning the
instrument panel brightness knob all the way clockwise.
Push the knob to release it from the stored position.
Turn the knob clockwise to brighten the lights or
counterclockwise to dim them.
Be sure not to have this knob turned all the way down
with the lamps on during the day. Your Driver
Information Center (DIC) may not be visible.
Exit/Entry Lighting
With entry lighting, the interior lamps will come on when
entering the vehicle. The interior lamps will come on
for about 20 seconds when the key is turned to OFF or
a door is ajar.
You can turn exit and entry lighting off by quickly turning
the headlamps on and off or by quickly turning the
courtesy lamps on and off.
3-17
Reading Lamps
Battery Run-Down Protection
Your vehicle has a feature to help prevent you from
draining the battery in case the underhood lamp, vanity
mirror lamps, cargo lamps, reading lamps, console or
glove box lamps are accidentally left on. If you leave any
of these lamps on, they will automatically timeout after
about 15 minutes. To reset it, all of the above lamps must
be turned off or the ignition key must be in ON.
Head-Up Display (HUD)
{CAUTION:
Your inside rearview mirror includes two reading lamps.
The lamps will go on when a door is opened. When
the doors are closed, each lamp can be turned on
individually by pressing the switch for that lamp.
There is also an interior console flood lamp located
underneath the rearview mirror which comes on during
nighttime operation or when the reading lamps are on.
3-18
If the HUD image is too bright, or too high in
your field of view, it may take you more time to
see things you need to see when it is dark
outside. Be sure to keep the HUD image dim
and placed low in your field of view.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Head-Up Display
(HUD), you can see some of the driver information that
appears on your instrument panel cluster.
The information may be displayed in English or metric
units and appears as an image focused out toward
the front of your vehicle. The HUD consists of the
following information:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Speedometer
Turn Signal Indicators
High-Beam Indicator Symbol
Tachometer
Oil, Temperature and Fuel Gages
Shift Light (Performance SHIFT Light)
This light is used for performance driving to indicate
that the vehicle’s best performance level has been
reached to shift the transmission into the next higher
gear. The SHIFT light will display at an engine speed
of about 5,750 rpm (6,250 rpm on Z06), just prior to
reaching the engine fuel cut-off mode.
• Check Gages Icon
There are five HUD selections that you can choose to
view in the HUD display. By pressing and holding
the PAGE button, you can scroll through these pages
in the following order:
•
•
•
•
•
Speed Only
Speed and Gage
Speed, Tachometer and Gage
Speed and Tachometer
Tachometer Only
When you have chosen the desired HUD display,
release the PAGE button.
Gages can be scrolled through by tapping the PAGE
button (only when a gage is displayed). The gages
shown are the following:
• Oil Pressure
• Coolant Temperature
• Fuel Level
The selections that you choose will remain in the HUD
display until they are changed.
3-19
Be sure to continue scanning your displays, controls
and driving environment just as you would in a vehicle
without HUD. If you never look at your instrument
panel cluster, you may not see something important,
such as a warning light. Under important warning
conditions, the CHECK GAGES icon will illuminate in
the HUD. View your Driver Information Center (DIC) for
more information.
3-20
The HUD controls are located to the left of the steering
wheel.
To adjust the HUD so you can see it properly, do the
following:
1. Start your engine and slide the HUD dimmer control
all the way up.
The brightness of the HUD image is determined by
the light conditions in the direction your vehicle is
facing and where you have the HUD dimmer control
set. If you are facing a dark object or a heavily
shaded area, your HUD may anticipate that you are
entering a dark area and may begin to dim.
It is possible for sunlight to enter the HUD causing
all of the graphics to light up. The display will
return to normal when the sunlight is no longer
entering the HUD.
2. Adjust the seat to a comfortable driving position.
If you change your seat position later, you may
have to re-adjust your HUD.
3. Press the top or bottom of the DISPLAY switch to
center the HUD image in your view.
The HUD image can only be adjusted up and down,
not side-to-side.
4. Slide the dimmer control downward until the HUD
image is no brighter than necessary.
To turn HUD off, slide the switch to OFF.
If the sun comes out or it becomes cloudy, you may
need to adjust the HUD brightness again using
the dimmer control. Polarized sunglasses could make
the HUD image harder to see.
To change from English to metric units, press the
E/M button located to the right of the steering wheel.
Clean the inside of the windshield as needed to remove
any dirt or film that reduces the sharpness or clarity
of the HUD image.
To clean the HUD, spray household glass cleaner on a
soft, clean cloth. Wipe the HUD lens gently, then dry
it. Do not spray cleaner directly on the lens because the
cleaner could leak into the unit.
If the ignition is on and you can’t see the HUD image,
check to see if:
•
•
•
•
Something is covering the HUD unit.
The HUD dimmer control is adjusted properly.
The HUD image is adjusted to the proper height.
Ambient light, in the direction your vehicle is facing,
is low.
• A fuse is blown. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers
on page 5-93.
Keep in mind that your windshield is part of the HUD
system. If you ever have to have your windshield
replaced, be sure to get one that is designed for HUD
or your HUD image may look blurred and out of focus.
3-21
Accessory Power Outlets
The accessory power outlet can be used to connect
electrical equipment such as a cellular phone or
CB radio.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Check with your
dealer before adding electrical equipment.
The accessory power outlet is located inside the center
console storage compartment, on the forward left side.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the
installation instructions included with the equipment.
To use the outlet, remove the tethered cap. When not
using it, always cover the outlet with the protective cap.
We recommend that you see a qualified technician or
your dealer for the proper installation of your equipment.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain the battery. Always turn
off electrical equipment when not in use and do
not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum
amperage rating.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can
cause damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlet and could result
in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer for additional information
on accessory power outlets.
3-22
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
The ashtray and cigarette lighter are located on the
instrument panel, in front of the shift lever. To use the
ashtray, lift up on the bottom of the door.
Notice: If you put papers or other flammable items
in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other smoking
materials could ignite them and possibly damage
your vehicle. Never put flammable items in the
ashtray.
Climate Controls
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System
With this system you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation for your vehicle.
Loose objects, such as paper clips, can lodge behind
and beneath the ashtray lid and prevent movement
of the lid. You should avoid putting small, loose objects
near the ashtray.
To use the cigarette lighter, push it in all the way and let
go. When it is ready, it will pop back out by itself.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating will not allow the lighter to back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating.
When your vehicle is first started, the display will show
the driver’s temperature setting, the fan speed and
the air delivery for about five seconds; then it will show
the outside temperature.
The digital display will show readings in Fahrenheit or
Celsius by pressing the E/M (English/metric) button
on the Driver Information Center (DIC).
3-23
Automatic Operation
AUTO (Automatic): Press the AUTO button to place
the entire system in the automatic mode. When
automatic operation is active, the system will
automatically control the inside temperature, the air
delivery mode and the fan speed.
After a five-second display of the current settings, only
the word AUTO and the outside temperature will be
shown on the digital display unless the system is set to
full cold 60°F (16°C) or full hot 90°F (32°C), then the
word AUTO will not display. The system will operate to
achieve your comfort set temperature as quickly as
possible. The AUTO control system works best with the
windows up and the removable roof installed or the
convertible top up.
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Adjust the temperature to a comfortable setting
between 60°F (16°C) or full hot 90°F (32°C).
Choosing the coldest or warmest temperature
setting will not cause the system to heat or cool
any faster. If you set the system at the coldest or
warmest temperature setting, the system will remain
in manual mode at that temperature and it will not
go into automatic mode.
In cold weather, the system will start at reduced fan
speeds at avoid blowing cold air into your vehicle
until warmer air is available. The system will start out
blowing air at the floor but may change modes
automatically as the vehicle warms up to maintain the
chosen temperature setting. The length of time
needed for warm up will depend on the outside
temperature and the length of time that has elapsed
since your vehicle was last driven.
3. Wait for the system to regulate. This may take from
10 to 30 minutes. Then adjust the temperature,
if necessary.
Do not cover the solar sensor located in the center of
the instrument panel, near the windshield. For more
information on the solar sensor, see “Sensor” later in
this section.
3-24
Manual Operation
To change the current mode, select one of the following:
OFF: Press this button to turn off the climate control
system. This is the only setting that fully shuts off
the fan. The digital display will show only the outside
temperature. You can still adjust the driver’s set
temperature, the passenger temperature offset and the
air intake mode while in OFF.
H (Vent):
MODE: Press this button to manually lock in the current
air delivery setting and to stop the automatic mode
control. Pressing the MODE button will delete AUTO
from the digital display and the mode graphics will
be shown. To change the setting, press the MODE
button again. The AUTO button must be pressed
to return to the automatic mode selection.
This mode directs most of the air to the
instrument panel outlets, with a very small amount of air
directed to the floor outlets.
% (Bi-Level):
This mode directs about half of the air to
the instrument panel outlets, and then directs most of the
remaining air to the floor outlets. Some air may be
directed toward the windshield. Cooler air is directed to
the upper outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets.
6 (Floor):
This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets with some air directed to the outboard
outlets (for the side windows) and some air directed to
the windshield.
The MODE button can also be used to select the defog
mode. Information on defogging and defrosting can
be found later in this section.
3-25
9(Fan):
Press the button with the fan symbol to
manually increase or decrease the fan speed.
Keep pressing the up or down arrow on this switch until
the desired fan speed appears on the display.
Pressing the arrows will delete AUTO from the digital
display. The fan graphics with the fan speed bars will
be shown. To increase the fan speed so that more
air flows into the vehicle, press the up arrow on the fan
switch. To decrease the fan speed and airflow, press
the down arrow. The AUTO button must be pressed to
return to the automatic fan control.
: (Outside Air):
Press this button to turn the
outside air mode on or off. When this mode is on,
outside air will circulate throughout your vehicle.
When the button is pressed, an indicator light in the
button will come on to let you know that it is activated.
The outside air mode can be used with all modes,
but cannot be used with the recirculation mode.
When in the AUTO mode, the system automatically
selects outside air instead of recirculation, as required,
to control the temperature in the vehicle. By pressing
outside air, the system will lock into the outside air
mode. Any adjustment to the air intake must then be
made manually. Outside air should be used when trying
to defrost or defog windows to help reduce moisture
inside of the vehicle.
If you are in city traffic, your vehicle is stopped and idling,
or the weather is hot, the system may switch from the
outside air mode to the recirculation mode. To prevent
the air inside of your vehicle from becoming stale, be sure
to return to the outside air mode periodically.
3-26
? (Recirculation):
This mode keeps outside air
from coming in the vehicle. It can be used to prevent
outside air and odors from entering your vehicle or
to help cool the air inside your vehicle more quickly.
Press this button to turn the recirculation mode on or off.
When the button is pressed, an indicator light will
come on. The air-conditioning compressor also comes
on. The recirculation mode cannot be used with the
outside air mode.
When in the AUTO mode, the system automatically
selects recirculation to cool the vehicle’s temperature.
By pressing this button, the system will lock into
recirculation mode. Any adjustment to the air intake
must then be made manually. Recirculation is not
available when using the defrost or defog mode because
outside air is needed to reduce moisture inside of the
vehicle.
Temperature Control: The DRIVER knob changes the
temperature on the driver’s and passenger’s side of
the vehicle. Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise
to manually increase or decrease the temperature
inside your vehicle. Whenever you turn this knob, the
temperature will be displayed for about five seconds
along with the current fan speed and air delivery mode.
The PASSENGER knob changes the temperature on
the passenger’s side of the vehicle. When the knob is in
the 12 o’clock position, the passenger’s temperature
is the same as the driver’s. Turn the knob clockwise for
warmer air on the passenger’s side or counterclockwise
for cooler air. If the driver-set temperature is set at
full cold 60°F (16°C) or full hot 90°F (32°C), turning the
PASSENGER knob has no effect because the system
is locked at a maximum setting.
Operating the system in the recirculation mode may
cause fogging of the vehicle’s windows when the
weather is cold and damp. To clear the fog, switch the
system to either the defog or defrost mode and
increase the fan speed. To avoid re-fogging of the
windows, operate the system in the outside air mode.
3-27
#A/C (Air Conditioning): Press this button to
override the automatic system and turn the
air-conditioning system on or off. When A/C is pressed,
an indicator light in the button will come on to let you
know that the air conditioning is activated. When in
AUTO, the air-conditioning compressor will come on
automatically, as necessary.
Air conditioning does not operate at temperatures below
about 35°F to 40°F (2°C to 4°C). In temperatures above
40°F (4°C), the air conditioning cannot be turned off in
defrost and defog, as it helps to remove moisture from
the vehicle. It also helps to keep the windows clear.
You may notice a slight change in engine performance
when the air-conditioning compressor shuts off and
turns on again. This is normal. The system is designed
to make adjustments to help with fuel economy while
still maintaining the selected temperature.
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air
escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time
it takes for your vehicle to cool down. It also helps
the system to operate more efficiently.
3-28
For quick cool down on hot days, do the following:
1. Select the vent mode.
2. Select recirculation mode.
3. Select the A/C.
4. Select the coolest temperature.
5. Select the highest fan speed.
Using these settings together for long periods of time
may cause the air inside of your vehicle to become too
dry. To prevent this from happening, after the air in
your vehicle has cooled, turn the recirculation mode off.
The air-conditioning system removes moisture from
the air, so you may sometimes notice a small amount of
water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling or
after turning off the engine. This is normal.
Sensors
The solar sensor on your vehicle monitors the solar
radiation and uses the information to maintain the
selected temperature when operating in AUTO mode by
initiating needed adjustments to the temperature, the
fan speed and the air delivery system. The system may
also supply cooler air to the side of the vehicle facing
the sun. The recirculation mode will also be activated,
as necessary. Do not cover the solar sensor located on
the top right side of the instrument panel near the
windshield or the system will not work properly.
There is also a sensor located behind the front bumper.
This sensor reads the outside air temperature and
helps to maintain the temperature inside the vehicle.
Any cover on the front of the vehicle could give a false
reading in the temperature.
If the outside temperature goes up, the displayed
temperature will not change until:
• The vehicle’s speed is above 16 mph (26 km/h) for
one and a half minutes.
• The vehicle’s speed is above 45 mph (72 km/h) for
one minute.
These delays prevent false readings. If the temperature
goes down, the outside temperature will be shown
when you start the vehicle. If it has been turned off for
less than three hours, the temperature will be recalled
from the previous vehicle operation.
There is also an inside temperature sensor located to
the left of the ignition switch. The automatic climate
control system uses this sensor to receive information,
so if you block or cover it, the system will not function
properly.
3-29
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity
(moisture) condensing on the cool window glass.
This can be minimized if the climate control system is
used properly. There are two modes to clear fog or frost
from your windshield. Use the defog mode to clear
the windows of fog or moisture and warm the
passengers. Use FRONT to remove fog or frost from
the windshield more quickly.
Press the MODE button until the defog mode appears
on the display.
- (Defog): This mode directs the air equally between
the windshield and the floor outlets with a small
amount to the side window outlets. When you select
this mode, the system turns off recirculation and runs
the air-conditioning compressor unless the outside
temperature is at or below freezing. An indicator
light in the A/C button will come on to let you know
that the air-conditioning compressor is activated.
The recirculation mode cannot be selected while in the
defog mode.
3-30
1 FRONT:
Pressing this button directs most of the
air to the windshield, with a small amount directed to the
side window outlets. The light on the button will come
on and the digital display will show the defrost mode
symbol and fan speed when the front defrost mode is
being used. In this mode, the system will automatically
turn off the recirculation and run the air-conditioning
compressor, unless the outside temperature is at
or below freezing. An indicator light in the A/C button
will come on to let you know that the air-conditioning
compressor is activated. Recirculation cannot be
selected while in the defrost mode. Pressing this button
again will return the system to the last operating
mode and the air intake mode will be in outside air.
If the system is in FRONT defrost when you shut the
engine off, it will restart in FRONT defrost unless
the engine is off for longer than 40 minutes. If the engine
is off longer than 40 minutes, the system will restart in
the operating mode that was set prior to FRONT defrost
and the air intake mode will be in outside air. Do not
drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
Rear Window Defogger
Outlet Adjustment
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog or frost from the rear window.
The rear window defogger will only work when the
engine is running.
Use the tab located on the air outlets to change the
direction of the airflow.
= REAR: Press this button to turn the rear window
defogger on. Be sure to clear as much snow from
the rear window as possible. An indicator light in the
button will come on to let you know that the rear window
defogger is activated.
The rear window defogger will automatically turn off
about 15 minutes after the button is pressed. If turned
on again, the defogger will only run for about seven
minutes before turning off. The defogger can also
be turned off by pressing the button again or by turning
off the engine.
Your vehicle has heated outside rearview mirrors.
The mirrors will heat to help clear fog or frost from the
surface of the mirrors when the rear window defog
button is pressed.
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the windshield that may
block the flow of air into your vehicle.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
• Keep the area around the base of the instrument
panel console and air path under the seats clear
of objects to help circulate the air inside of
your vehicle more effectively.
Notice: Don’t use anything sharp on the inside of
the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage
the warming grid, and the repairs wouldn’t be
covered by your warranty. Do not attach a temporary
vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything similar
to the defogger grid.
3-31
Warning Lights, Gages and
Indicators
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly — and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights
and gages. They’re a big help.
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you locate
them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you
or others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you
will see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the engine
just to let you know they’re working. If you are familiar
with this section, you should not be alarmed when
this happens.
3-32
Your vehicle may also have a Driver Information Center
that works along with the warning lights and gages.
See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-48.
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster and Driver Information Center (DIC) are designed to let you know at a glance how
the vehicle is running. You will know how fast you are going, about how much fuel you have left and many
other things you will need to know to drive safely and economically. The instrument panel cluster indicator warning
lights, gages and DIC messages are explained on the following pages.
United States shown, Canada similar
3-33
Speedometer and Odometer
Tachometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in either
miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h).
The tachometer displays the engine speed in thousands
of revolutions per minute (rpm).
There is only one scale for mph and km/h. When you
press the E/M (English/metric) button on the Driver
Information Center (DIC), the cluster will calculate the
proper speed and move the needle to the correct
position. Either the MPH or the km/h telltale will
illuminate, depending on which measurement you
choose.
Fuel will shut off at about 6200 rpm (6500 rpm for Z06).
To read the odometer with the ignition off, turn on the
parking lamps.
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a
new odometer installed. The mileage total of the new
odometer will be set to the original miles (kilometers) of
the old odometer. See your dealer if the odometer must
be replaced in your vehicle.
3-34
If you continue to drive your vehicle at the fuel shut
off rpm, you could damage your engine. Be sure
to operate your vehicle below the fuel shut off rpm or
reduce your rpm quickly when the fuel shuts off.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned to ON or START, a chime will
come on for several seconds to remind people to fasten
their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is
already buckled.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay on
until the driver’s belt is
buckled.
Air Bag Readiness Light
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows a deployed air bag symbol.
The system checks the air bag’s electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. The system check includes the air bag modules,
the wiring and the diagnostic module. For more
information on the air bag system, see Air Bag System
on page 1-40.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash for
a few seconds. Then the
light should go out. This
means the system is ready.
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your air
bag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
{CAUTION:
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the air bag system
may not be working properly. The air bags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle serviced right away if the air bag
readiness light stays on after you start your
vehicle.
The air bag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to ON. If the
light does not come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
3-35
Air Bag Off Light
When you turn the passenger’s air bag off, this light will
come on and stay on to remind you that the air bag
has been turned off. This light will go off when you turn
the air bag back on again. See Air Bag Off Switch
on page 1-46 for more on this, including important safety
information.
3-36
{CAUTION:
If the passenger’s air bag is turned off for a
person who isn’t in a risk group identified by
the national government, that person won’t
have the extra protection of an air bag. In a
crash, the air bag wouldn’t be able to inflate
and help protect the person sitting there.
Don’t turn off the passenger’s air bag unless
the person sitting there is in a risk group.
See “Air Bag Off Switch” in the Index for more
on this, including important safety information.
Voltmeter Gage
{CAUTION:
If the air bag readiness light ever comes on
when you have turned off the air bag, it means
that something may be wrong with the air bag
system. The passenger’s air bag could inflate
even though the switch is off. If this ever
happens, don’t let anyone whom the national
government has identified as a member of a
passenger air bag risk group sit in the
passenger’s position (for example, don’t
secure a rear-facing child restraint in your
vehicle) until you have your vehicle serviced.
See “Air Bag Off Switch” in the Index.
When the key is in ON with
the engine not running,
the voltmeter shows the
voltage output of your
battery. When the engine
is running, it shows the
voltage output of the
charging system.
The reading will change as the rate of charge changes
(with engine speed, for example), but if the voltmeter
reads at 9 volts or below, your instrument panel cluster
and other systems may shut down. The Driver
Information Center (DIC) will read LOW VOLTAGE
when your vehicle is at 10 volts or below. Have it
checked right away. Driving with the voltmeter reading
at 10 volts or below could drain your battery and disable
your vehicle.
3-37
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part is not working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though,
you need both parts working well.
This light should come on
when you turn the ignition
key to START. If it
does not come on then,
have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if
there is a problem.
If this warning light stays on after you start the engine,
the parking brake may still be set or there could be
a brake problem. Refer to Parking Brake on page 2-31
to see if it is set. If the parking brake is not set, have
your brake system inspected right away.
3-38
If the light comes on while you are driving and you have a
LOW BRAKE FLUID message showing on the DIC, pull
off the road and stop carefully. You may notice that the
pedal is harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to
the floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on,
have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing Your
Vehicle on page 4-33.
{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light is
on. Driving with the brake system warning light
on can lead to an accident. If the light is still
on after you have pulled off the road and
stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed
for service.
Anti-Lock Brake System
Warning Light
With the anti-lock brake
system, the light will come
on when your engine is
started and may stay on for
several seconds. That is
normal.
If the light stays on, turn the ignition to OFF. Or, if the light
comes on when you are driving, stop as soon as possible
and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine again to
reset the system. If the light still stays on, or comes on
again while you are driving, your vehicle needs service.
If the regular brake system warning light is not on, you
still have brakes, but you do not have anti-lock brakes.
If the regular brake system warning light is also on, you
do not have anti-lock brakes and there is a problem with
your regular brakes. See Brake System Warning Light on
page 3-38. Also see “Service ABS” under DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 3-58.
The anti-lock brake system warning light will come on
briefly when you turn the ignition key to ON. This is
normal. If the light does not come on then, have it fixed
so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light
This light should come on
briefly as you start the
engine. If the light does not
come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to
warn you if there is a
problem.
If it stays on, or comes on and the DIC shows a
SERVICE TRACTION SYSTEM message when you are
driving, there is a problem with your TCS system and
your vehicle needs service. When this light is on,
the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving
accordingly. If the driver turns off the Traction Control
System by pressing the button on the console, the TCS
system light will come on and the TRACTION SYSTEM
OFF message will show on the DIC.
3-39
Active Handling System Light
The Active Handling System light will come on briefly as
you start the engine. If the light does not come on
then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there
is a problem. The light will also come on while the
system warms up and the ACT HNDLING WARMING
UP message will be displayed in the Driver Information
Center (DIC).
If the light stays on or
comes on while you are
driving, a chime sounds
and a SERVICE ACTIVE
HNDLG message appears
on the DIC, there is a
problem with your Active
Handling System and
your vehicle needs service.
3-40
The driver can acknowledge this message by pressing
the RESET button. When the SERVICE ACTIVE HNDLG
message is displayed, the Active Handling System will
not assist you in controlling the vehicle. You should have
the system serviced as soon as possible. Adjust your
driving accordingly.
When the system is working, you will see the ACTIVE
HANDLING message displayed in the DIC. You may also
feel or hear the system working. This is normal.
If the driver turns off the Active Handling System by
pressing the button on the console, the Active Handling
System light will come on, a chime will sound, and
the TRAC/ACT HNDLG OFF message will be displayed
in the DIC. The Traction Control System will also be
turned off. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 3-58 for more information.
If the Active Handling System and the Traction Control
System are off, pressing the console button momentarily
will turn both systems on. The DIC will display the
TRAC/ACT HNDLG ON message, the instrument cluster
light will be off, and a chime will sound. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-58 for more
information.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
Your vehicle is equipped
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition and emission
control systems.
United States
Canada
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.
If the gage pointer moves into the shaded area,
your engine is too hot.
This means that your engine coolant has overheated.
If you have been operating your vehicle under normal
driving conditions, you should pull off the road, stop your
vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible.
(The larger tic marks are in increments of 30° below
220°F (104°C) and in increments of 10° above 220°F
(104°C).)
See Engine Overheating on page 5-26 for more
information.
This system is called OBD II (On-Board DiagnosticsSecond Generation) and is intended to assure that
emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of
the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner environment.
The CHECK ENGINE light comes on to indicate
that there is a problem and service is required.
Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system
before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more
serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also
designed to assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after a while, your emission controls may
not work as well, your fuel economy may not be as
good and your engine may not run as smoothly.
This could lead to costly repairs that may not be
covered by your warranty.
3-41
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake or fuel system of your
vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and may cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This may
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test.
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is
not running. If the light does not come on, have it
repaired. This light will also come on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and may damage the emission control system on
your vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be
required.
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service may be required.
3-42
If the Light Is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
• Reducing vehicle speed.
• Avoiding hard accelerations.
• Avoiding steep uphill grades.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,
see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still
flashing, follow the previous steps, and see your dealer
for service as soon as possible.
If the Light Is On Steady
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
You also may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.
See Gasoline Octane on page 5-4. Poor fuel quality will
cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling
when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation
on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the
light to turn on.
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
the cap. See Filling Your Tank on page 5-7. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer has
the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix
any mechanical or electrical problems that may
have developed.
3-43
Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs
Engine Oil Pressure Gage
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
CHECK ENGINE light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determines that
critical emission control systems have not been
completely diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would
be considered not ready for inspection. This can
happen if you have recently replaced your battery or
if your battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
system readiness, your GM dealer can prepare the
vehicle for inspection.
3-44
United States
Canada
The engine oil pressure gage shows the engine oil
pressure in psi (pounds per square inch) or kPa
(kilopascals) when the engine is running.
Oil pressure should be 20 to 80 psi (140 to 550 kPa).
In certain situations such as long, extended idles on
hot days, it could read as low as 6 psi (40 kPa) and still
be considered normal. It may vary with engine speed,
outside temperature and oil viscosity, but readings
above the shaded area show the normal operating
range. Readings in the shaded area tell you that the
engine is low on oil, or that you might have some other
oil problem. See Engine Oil on page 5-13.
The engine oil pressure can also be displayed using the
GAGES button on the Driver Information Center (DIC).
See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-48.
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
If you do, your engine can become so hot that
it catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
Security Light
This light comes on to
remind you to arm your
theft-deterrent system. If it
comes on and stays on
when your ignition is
on, there may be a
problem with your
theft-deterrent system.
See Theft-Deterrent System on page 2-16 and
PASS-Key® on page 2-18.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance
may damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
3-45
Check Gages Warning Light
This light will come on
briefly when you are
starting the engine. If the
light comes on and
stays on while you are
driving, check your gages
to see if they are in the
warning areas.
Fuel Gage
Your fuel gage tells you
about how much fuel you
have left when the
ignition is on.
This light can come on for the following reasons:
•
•
•
•
Low Oil Pressure
High Coolant Temperature
High or Low Battery Voltage
Low Fuel Level
When the needle approaches the red zone, RESERVE
FUEL will appear on the Driver Information Center (DIC)
display. When the needle approaches the E, LOW
FUEL will appear on the display. At this time, you still
have a little fuel left, but you should get more soon.
Press RESET to acknowledge a DIC message(s).
Pressing RESET will also turn off a DIC message but
the LOW FUEL message will come on again in
10 minutes if you have not added fuel to the vehicle.
3-46
Here are five things that some owners ask about.
All these things are normal and do not indicate that
anything is wrong with the fuel gage.
• At the gas station, the gas pump shuts off before
the gage reads F (full).
• It takes more (or less) fuel to fill up than the gage
reads. For example, the gage reads half full, but it
took more (or less) than half of the tank’s capacity
to fit it.
• The gage pointer may move while cornering, braking
or speeding up.
• The gage may not indicate E (empty) when the
ignition is turned off.
• The gage reading may change slightly within the first
several minutes after starting the vehicle.
You can use the Driver Information Center (DIC) to
display more detailed fuel information. Each time you
press FUEL, one of the following will appear in the
Driver Information Center (DIC).
• AVERAGE: The fuel economy calculated for the
current tank of fuel, or since you last reset the
display.
• INST (Instant): The fuel economy calculated for
your current driving conditions.
• RANGE: The distance you can drive before
refueling.
You should reset the fuel information display every time
you refuel. To reset the display, press FUEL until
AVERAGE appears. Then, press RESET on the
Driver Information Center (DIC).
3-47
Driver Information Center (DIC)
The Driver Information Center (DIC) will display
information about how your vehicle is functioning, as
well as warning messages if a system problem is
detected. The DIC display area is located in the
instrument panel cluster below the speedometer and
tachometer, directly above the steering column.
The following buttons are located on the DIC control
panel which is located to the right of the instrument
panel cluster.
1 FUEL: Press this button to display fuel information
such as fuel economy and range.
2 GAGES: Press this button to display gage information
like oil pressure and temperature, coolant temperature,
automatic transmission fluid temperature (if equipped),
battery voltage and front/rear tire pressures.
3 TRIP: Press this button to display your total and trip
miles, the elapsed time function, your average speed
and the engine oil life.
4 OPTIONS: This button allows you to choose personal
options that are available on your vehicle, depending
on the options your vehicle is equipped with, such
as security, door locks, easy entry seats and language.
5 E/M (English/Metric): Press this button to change
the display between English and metric units.
RESET: This button, used along with the other buttons,
will reset system functions and turn off or acknowledge
messages on the Driver Information Center (DIC).
At the top of the DIC control buttons is a light sensor.
Be sure not to block the sensor or your lighting functions
may be disrupted.
3-48
DIC Controls and Displays
1 FUEL
Turn on the system by turning the ignition to ON. When
you turn on the ignition, the DIC will be in the mode
last displayed when the engine was turned off. Each DIC
button allows you to scroll through a menu. A blank
page ends each menu.
If a problem is detected, a diagnostic message will
appear on the display. Press RESET to acknowledge
any current warning or service messages. The following
pages will show the messages you can see on the
Driver Information Center (DIC) display by pressing the
DIC buttons.
The FUEL button displays average fuel economy and
instantaneous fuel economy calculated for your specific
driving conditions and range.
Press the FUEL button to display average fuel economy,
such as:
• AVERAGE 20.1 MPG or
• AVERAGE 5.3 L/100 km
3-49
The average fuel economy is viewed as a long-term
approximation of your overall driving conditions. If you
press RESET in this mode while you’re driving, the
system will begin figuring fuel economy from that point
in time.
2 GAGES
The GAGES button allows you to scroll through the
functions listed below when you press it.
Press FUEL again to display instantaneous fuel
economy, such as:
• INST. 20.1 MPG or
• INST. 5.3 L/100 km
Press FUEL again to display the range, such as:
• RANGE 20 MI or
• RANGE 32 km
The range calculates the remaining distance you can
drive without refueling. It’s based on fuel economy and
the fuel remaining in the tank.
If the range is lower than 30 miles (48 km), the display
will read RANGE LOW.
The fuel economy data used to determine fuel range is
an average of recent driving conditions. As your
driving conditions change, this data is gradually updated.
Resetting the fuel range causes the fuel economy
data to be updated immediately. Press RESET to reset
the fuel range.
3-50
Press the GAGE button to display the oil pressure,
such as:
• OIL PRESSURE 40 PSI or
• OIL PRESSURE 276 kPa
Press the GAGE button again to display the oil
temperature, such as:
• OIL TEMP 234°F or
• OIL TEMP 112°C
Press the GAGE button again to display the coolant
temperature, such as:
• COOLANT TEMP 123°F or
• COOLANT TEMP 51°C
Press the GAGE button again to display the automatic
transmission fluid temperature (if equipped), such as:
Press the GAGE button again to display the tire
pressure for the front tires (except Z06), such as:
• FRONT L34 R33 PSI or
• FRONT L234 R228 kPa
Press the GAGE button again to display the tire
pressure for the rear tires (except Z06), such as:
• REAR L34 R33 PSI or
• REAR L234 R228 kPa
Tire pressure is not available until the vehicle has
reached a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h) or more.
• TRANS FLUID 123°F or
• TRANS FLUID 51°C
Press the GAGE button again to display the battery
voltage, such as:
• BATTERY VOLTS 13.5
3-51
3 TRIP
Without the keys in the ignition, you can also display the
odometer by turning on the parking lamps.
The TRIP button allows you to scroll through the
functions listed below when you press it.
Trip Odometers
There are two trip odometers. Press the TRIP button
and TRIP A will be displayed. Press it again and TRIP B
will be displayed. TRIP A could be used to track the
distance to a destination. TRIP B could be used to track
maintenance periods.
1. TRIP A 130.5 MI or
2. TRIP A 209.9 km
3. TRIP B 300.5 MI or
4. TRIP B 483.5 km
The trip odometers can be reset by pressing the RESET
button on the DIC. Both of the trip odometers can be
used simultaneously.
Miles Since Last Ignition Feature
Odometer
The odometer shows how far your vehicle has been
driven in either miles or kilometers. Press the TRIP
button to display odometer readings such as:
• ODOMETER 12345 MI or
• ODOMETER 20008 km
3-52
You can also display number of miles (kilometers)
driven since you last started the vehicle if you press and
hold the RESET button for two seconds, then release.
The miles (or kilometers) since the last ignition cycle will
be set into the trip odometer.
Elapsed Time
Engine Oil Life
Press the TRIP button until ELAP. TIME is displayed,
such as ELAP. TIME 00:00:00.00.
Press the TRIP button until the engine oil life is
displayed, such as OIL LIFE REMAIN 89%.
When the ignition is in ON, the Driver Information
Center (DIC) can be used as a stopwatch. The display
can show hours, minutes, seconds and hundredths of a
second. The elapsed time indicator will record up to
99 hours, 59 minutes and 59 seconds, then it will reset to
zero and continue counting. (Hundredths are shown up to
59 minutes, 59 seconds and 99 hundredths). The display
appears as ELAP. TIME 00:00:00.00 in the elapsed time
function.
This is an estimate of the engine oil’s remaining useful
life. It will show 100% when the system is reset after
an oil change. It will alert you to change your oil
on a schedule consistent with your driving conditions.
You can start or stop the elapsed time by pressing
RESET. To reset the elapsed time to zero, stop the
timer by pressing RESET. Then press and hold RESET
until ELAP. TIME 00:00:00.00 appears in the DIC.
Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE yourself after
each oil change. It will not reset itself. Also, be careful not
to reset the OIL LIFE accidentally at any time other than
when the oil has just been changed.
It can’t be reset accurately until the next oil change.
Average Speed
Press the TRIP button until the average speed is
displayed, such as:
• AVERAGE SPEED 62 MPH or
• AVERAGE SPEED 100 km/h
When the remaining oil life is low, the system will
alert you with the message CHANGE OIL SOON.
When the oil life is down to zero, you will receive the
message CHANGE OIL NOW.
To reset the system, see “How to Reset the Change
Oil Soon Message” under Engine Oil on page 5-13.
Also, see Engine Oil on page 5-13 and Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-4.
Press reset in this mode to start calculating the average
speed. Press and hold RESET to clear.
3-53
4 OPTIONS
This button allows you to choose personal options that
may be available on your vehicle, depending on the
options your vehicle is equipped with. Some of these
functions work along with the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
When returning to the options menu, the first item of the
options list will always be displayed, not the one you
were last in when you changed buttons.
The following are the options listed under the
OPTIONS button:
Twilight (Optional in United States,
Standard in Canada)
Press the OPTIONS button until TWILIGHT-OFF
appears on the display, then use the RESET button to
page through the following selections:
• TWILIGHT – ON
• TWILIGHT – OFF
If you choose TWILIGHT – ON, press the OPTIONS
button again to display DELAY TIME 1 2 in the DIC.
Use the OPTIONS button to switch between delay time
1 and 2. You can increase the delay time by pressing
button 1 (1 FUEL) or decrease the time by pressing
button 2 (2 GAGES). Each bar is equal to 12 seconds.
3-54
Lock and Arm
Alarm
Press the OPTIONS button until LOCK & ARM appears
on the display, then use the RESET button to page
through the following selections:
Press the OPTIONS button until ALARM appears on the
display, then use the RESET button to page through
the following selections:
• ALARM-HORN
• ALARM HORN & LIGHTS
If you choose ALARM-HORN, the horn will sound during
an alarm.
If you choose ALARM HORN & LIGHTS, the horn will
sound and the interior and exterior lamps will flash
during an alarm.
•
•
•
•
LOCK & ARM – OFF
LOCK & ARM – HORN ONLY
LOCK & ARM – LIGHTS ONLY
LOCK & ARM – HORN & LIGHTS
If you choose LOCK & ARM – OFF, you will receive no
security feedback when locking or unlocking your vehicle.
If you choose LOCK & ARM – HORN ONLY, only the
horn will chirp to let you know when your alarm system
has armed when locking your vehicle.
If you choose LOCK & ARM – LIGHTS ONLY, only your
exterior lamps will flash to let you know when your
alarm system has armed when locking your vehicle.
If you choose LOCK & ARM – HORN & LIGHTS, the horn
will chirp and the exterior lamps will flash briefly to let you
know the system has armed when locking your vehicle.
Approach Lights
Press the OPTIONS button until APPROACH LIGHTS
appears on the display, then use the RESET button
to page through the following choices:
• APPROACH LIGHTS ON
• APPROACH LIGHTS OFF
If you choose APPROACH LIGHTS ON, the fog lamps,
front turn signal, rear back-up and courtesy lamps
will come on for 30 seconds when you press UNLOCK
on the remote keyless entry transmitter. This will
occur only when it is dark outside.
APPROACH LIGHTS OFF turns off this option.
See Remote Keyless Entry System on page 2-5 for
more information.
3-55
Auto Lock
Press the OPTIONS button until AUTO LOCK appears
on the display, then use the RESET button to page
through the following choices:
• AUTO LOCK ON
• AUTO LOCK OFF
If you choose AUTO LOCK ON, both doors will
automatically lock when the vehicle exceeds 10 mph
(16 km/h) in a manual transmission. In a vehicle with an
automatic transmission, both doors will automatically
lock when you move the shift lever out of PARK (P).
Choose AUTO LOCK OFF to turn this option off.
Auto Unlock
The AUTO UNLOCK will be available only if AUTO
LOCK is set to ON as described previously.
Press the OPTIONS button until AUTO UNLOCK
appears on the display, then use the RESET button to
page through the following choices:
• AUTO UNLOCK DRIVER
• AUTO UNLOCK BOTH
• AUTO UNLOCK OFF
If you choose AUTO UNLOCK DRIVER, the driver’s
door will automatically unlock when you turn the vehicle
off and pull the key out of the ignition.
3-56
Choose AUTO UNLOCK BOTH, and both doors will
automatically unlock when you turn the vehicle off and
pull the key out of the ignition.
AUTO UNLOCK OFF turns off this option.
Easy Entry
The easy entry feature will only be available if the
vehicle is equipped with the memory option.
Press the OPTIONS button until SEAT EASY ENTRY
appears on the display, then use the RESET button
to page through the following choices:
• SEAT EASY ENTRY ON
• SEAT EASY ENTRY OFF
If you choose SEAT EASY ENTRY ON, when you turn
the ignition off and remove the key, the seat will
automatically move back and the telescopic steering
wheel (if equipped) will return to its full-forward position
for an easy exit or an easy entrance when returning
to the vehicle.
The seat will only return to the forward position if you
unlock the door with the keyless entry transmitter
or press the appropriate MEMORY button.
SEAT EASY ENTRY OFF turns off this option.
Languages
You can select which language the DIC will display its
messages. Press the OPTIONS button until the
word LANGUAGES appears on the display, then use
the RESET button to page through the following choices:
•
•
•
•
LANGUAGE ENGLISH
LANGUAGE FRENCH
LANGUAGE GERMAN
LANGUAGE SPANISH
Blank Page
TIRE TRAINING (Except Z06): The Tire Pressure
Monitor (TPM) operates with battery-powered sensors
that are located inside the valve stems on each tire.
Each sensor has a unique ID code so the vehicle
knows the tire location of the sensor. When the vehicle
reaches a speed of greater than 15 mph (24 km/h),
the sensors begin to send the tire pressure readings
to a receiver inside the vehicle. These readings are
displayed when using the GAGES button on the DIC.
If you are unable to display your tire pressures while the
vehicle speed is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), you
may need to have your sensor ID codes learned by the
vehicle. See your dealer.
There is a blank page at the end of the OPTIONS
menu. When the blank page is displayed, you
can access the following items:
FOB TRAINING: This option allows you to match the
RKE transmitter(s) to your vehicle. You can access this
option by pressing and holding RESET for three
seconds while you are on the blank page at the end of
the OPTIONS menu. The message FOB TRAINING
will be displayed. See “Matching Transmitter(s) To
Your Vehicle” under Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation on page 2-6.
3-57
DIC Warnings and Messages
The following messages and warnings may appear in
the DIC display. The DIC display area is located in
the instrument panel cluster below the speedometer
and tachometer, directly above the steering column.
You may receive more than one message at a
time. Messages will appear one behind the other.
To acknowledge a message and remove it from the
display, press RESET. You may scroll through the
messages that may have been sent at the same time.
The message center is continuously updated with
the vehicle performance status.
ABS ACTIVE (Anti-Lock Brake System Active):
When your anti-lock system is adjusting brake pressure
to help avoid a braking skid, the ABS ACTIVE
message will be displayed.
Slippery road conditions may exist if this message
is displayed, so adjust your driving accordingly.
The message will stay on for a few seconds after the
system stops adjusting brake pressure.
3-58
ACT HNDLG – WARMING UP: When you first start
your vehicle (especially during cold winter weather),
and begin to drive away (up to 6 mph (10 km/h)),
the message ACT HNDLG – WARMING UP may be
displayed in the DIC, the instrument panel cluster light
will be on, and a chime will sound. This is normal.
You can acknowledge this message by pressing the
RESET button. The Active Handling System
performance is affected until the next message
WARM UP COMPLETE is displayed in the DIC.
During hot or cold temperature conditions, this message
may be displayed in the DIC after exceeding 12 mph
(20 km/h) for 30 seconds. The Active Handling System
is off until the WARM UP COMPLETE message is
displayed.
ACTIVE HANDLING: Your vehicle is equipped with a
computer controlled system to assist the driver in
controlling the vehicle in difficult driving conditions.
You may feel or hear the system working and see the
ACTIVE HANDLING message displayed in the DIC.
This is normal when the system is operating. Also see
Braking on page 4-6.
CHARGE SYSTEM FAULT: Press RESET to
acknowledge that you have read the message and to
remove it from the display. The message will reappear
every 10 minutes until this condition changes. You will
hear two chimes when this message is displayed.
If this message comes on while you are driving, you
may have a problem with the electrical charging system.
It could indicate that you have a loose or broken drive
belt or another electrical problem. Have it checked
right away. Driving while this light is on could drain
your battery.
If you must drive a short distance with the message on,
be certain to turn off your accessories, such as the
radio and air conditioner.
COMPETITIVE DRIVING: When the Competitive
Driving mode is selected, this message will be displayed
in the DIC. The instrument panel cluster light will not
be on when the Competitive Driving mode is selected.
The Traction Control System will not be operating
while in the Competitive Driving mode. You should
adjust your driving accordingly.
COOLANT OVER TEMP: You will hear four chimes
and the CHECK GAGES telltale will come on when this
message is displayed. To acknowledge the warning,
press the RESET button. After you press the RESET
button, a message will be displayed and you will
hear a chime every minute until this condition changes.
If you do not press RESET, the message will remain
on the digital display until the condition changes.
If the engine coolant exceeds 255°F (124°C), this
message is displayed. If you have been operating your
vehicle under normal driving conditions, you should
pull off the road, stop your vehicle and turn off the
engine as soon as possible. You can monitor the coolant
temperature with the GAGES button on the DIC or
the engine coolant gage on the instrument panel cluster.
See Engine Overheating on page 5-26.
3-59
FLAT TIRE (Except Z06): You will hear two chimes
when this message is displayed followed by the message
MAX SPEED 55 MPH (90 km/h). If this message
appears, do not drive your vehicle above this limit.
The next message to appear is REDUCED HANDLING.
Adjust your driving accordingly. To acknowledge these
warnings, press RESET. After you press RESET, a
message will reappear every 10 minutes until this
condition changes. This message indicates that the
pressure in one of your tires is lower than 5 psi (34 kPa).
Next to the FLAT TIRE message, you can see either
LF (left front), LR (left rear), RF (right front) or RR (right
rear) to indicate to you which tire is flat. You can receive
more than one tire pressure message at a time. To read
other messages that may have been sent at the same
time, press RESET. If a tire pressure message appears
on the DIC, stop as soon as you can. Have the tire
pressures checked and set to those shown on your
Tire Loading Information Label. See Extended Mobility
Tires (Except Z06) on page 5-61 and Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 5-62.
3-60
{CAUTION:
When the LOW TIRE PRESSURE or FLAT TIRE
message is displayed on the Driver Information
Center, your vehicle’s handling capabilities
will be reduced during severe maneuvers.
If you drive too fast, you could lose control of
your vehicle. You or others could be injured.
Don’t drive over 55 mph (90 km/h) when the
LOW TIRE PRESSURE or FLAT TIRE message
is displayed. Drive cautiously and check your
tire pressures as soon as you can.
HIGH TIRE PRESSURE – (LF, LR, RF, RR)
(Except Z06): You will hear two chimes when this
message is displayed. To acknowledge the warning,
press RESET. After you press RESET, a message
will reappear every 10 minutes until this condition
changes. This message indicates that the pressure in
one of your tires is higher than 42 psi (290 kPa).
Next to the HIGH TIRE PRESSURE message, you can
see either LF (left front), LR (left rear), RF (right front)
or RR (right rear) to indicate to you which tire is higher
than 42 psi (290 kPa). You can receive more than
one tire pressure message at a time. To read other
messages that may have been sent at the same time,
press RESET. If a tire pressure message appears on
the DIC, stop as soon as you can. Have the tire
pressures checked and set to those shown on your
Tire Loading Information Label. See Extended Mobility
Tires (Except Z06) on page 5-61 and Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 5-62.
HIGH TRANS TEMP (Automatic Transmission Only):
You will hear four chimes when this message is
displayed. To acknowledge this warning, press the
RESET button. After you press the RESET button,
the message will be displayed every 10 minutes until
the condition changes. If you do not press RESET,
the message remains on the display until the condition
changes.
If the transmission fluid temperature rises above
270°F (132°C) or rises rapidly, this message is displayed.
The transmission may shift gears or apply the torque
converter clutch to reduce the fluid temperature. Driving
aggressively or driving on long hills can cause the
transmission fluid temperature to be higher than normal.
If this message appears, you may continue to drive at a
slower speed. You should also monitor the transmission
fluid temperature and allow it to cool to at least 230°F
(110°C). The transmission fluid temperature can be
monitored with the GAGES button on the DIC. See
Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 5-20. You should
also check the engine coolant temperature. If it is also
hot, see Engine Overheating on page 5-26.
If the HIGH TRANS TEMP message is displayed during
normal vehicle operation on flat roads, your vehicle may
need service. See your dealer for an inspection.
3-61
LOW OIL LEVEL: Press RESET to acknowledge that
you have read the message and to remove it from
the display. The message will reappear every
10 minutes until this condition changes. Once the
vehicle senses a temperature change in the engine oil,
the light will remain off.
You will hear two chimes when this message is
displayed. If this message appears after starting your
engine, your engine oil level may be too low. You may
need to add oil. See Engine Overheating on page 5-26.
LOW OIL PRESSURE: You will hear four chimes
and the CHECK GAGES telltale will come on when this
message is displayed. To acknowledge the warning,
press the RESET button. After you press the RESET
button, a message will be displayed and you will hear
a chime every minute until the vehicle is serviced. If you
do not press RESET, the message will remain on the
digital display until the vehicle is serviced.
Low oil pressure may be the result of a combination
of low oil level and abrupt changes in the vehicle’s
direction. When this warning is displayed, you should
not operate the engine at high rpm or make fast abrupt
moves. As soon as possible, you should check the
oil level. See Engine Oil on page 5-13.
3-62
LOW TIRE PRESSURE (Except Z06): You will
hear two chimes when this message is displayed.
To acknowledge the warning, press RESET. After you
press RESET, a message will appear every 10 minutes
until this condition changes. This message indicates
that the pressure in one of your tires is less than
25 psi (172 kPa). Next to the LOW TIRE PRESSURE
message, you can see either LF (left front),
LR (left rear), RF (right front) or RR (right rear) to
indicate to you which tire is low on pressure. You can
receive more than one tire pressure message at a time.
To read other messages that may have been sent at
the same time, press RESET. If a tire pressure
message appears on the DIC, stop as soon as you can.
Have the tire pressures checked and set to those
shown on your Tire Loading Information Label.
See Extended Mobility Tires (Except Z06) on page 5-61
and Tire Pressure Monitor Operation (Except Z06) on
page 5-64.
{CAUTION:
When the LOW TIRE PRESSURE or FLAT TIRE
message is displayed on the Driver Information
Center, your vehicle’s handling capabilities
will be reduced during severe maneuvers.
If you drive too fast, you could lose control of
your vehicle. You or others could be injured.
Don’t drive over 55 mph (90 km/h) when the
LOW TIRE PRESSURE or FLAT TIRE message
is displayed. Drive cautiously and check your
tire pressures as soon as you can.
MAXIMUM SPEED 80 MPH (129 km/h): You will
hear four chimes when this message is displayed.
To acknowledge the warning, press RESET.
After you press RESET, a message will reappear
every 10 minutes until this condition changes.
This message indicates that a malfunction is present in
the selective real time damping system. The vehicle
speed will be limited to 80 mph (129 km/h) when
the shock absorber system has failed and the shocks
are in their full soft mode. Have your vehicle serviced
as soon as possible.
PULL KEY – WAIT 10 SEC (Manual Transmission
Only): If this message comes on, the steering column
lock system has detected a problem while disengaging
the steering column lock. This message may occur when
the ignition key is removed and reinserted before the
steering column lock system fully locks or unlocks
the steering column. To acknowledge that you have read
this message, and to clear it from the display, remove
the ignition key and wait 10 seconds before reinserting
the key into the ignition. If you attempt to operate
your vehicle without removing the key for 10 seconds,
the vehicle’s fuel system will shut off when you
reach 1.5 mph (2.4 km/h). If the message stays on after
removing the key and waiting 10 seconds, have your
vehicle taken to an authorized dealer as soon as
possible for diagnosis and repair.
3-63
REDUCED ENGINE POWER: You will hear chimes
continuously when this message is displayed. To
acknowledge that you have read the message and to
remove it from the display, press RESET. The message
will reappear every 15 seconds until this condition
changes.
If the Driver Information Center (DIC) displays the
REDUCED ENGINE POWER message and the CHECK
ENGINE light comes on, a noticeable reduction in the
vehicle’s performance may occur. If the REDUCED
ENGINE POWER message is displayed but there is no
reduction in performance, proceed to your destination.
The performance may be reduced the next time
the vehicle is driven.
The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speed while
the REDUCED ENGINE POWER message is displayed,
but acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime
the CHECK ENGINE light stays on, the vehicle
should be taken to an authorized dealer as soon as
possible for diagnosis and repair.
Also, refer to Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-41.
If the REDUCED ENGINE POWER message is
displayed in combination with the COOLANT OVER
TEMP message, see Engine Overheating on page 5-26.
3-64
REDUCE ENGINE RPM: You will hear four chimes
when this message is displayed. To acknowledge the
warning, press the RESET button. After you press the
RESET button, a message will be displayed and you will
hear a chime every minute until this condition changes.
If you do not press RESET, the message will remain on
the digital display until the condition changes.
If the engine oil temperature exceeds 320°F (160°C),
this message is displayed. You should check the engine
coolant temperature and engine oil level. If your engine is
too hot, see Engine Overheating on page 5-26. Your
vehicle may need service, so see your dealer. You can
monitor the oil temperature with the GAGES button on
the DIC.
SERVICE ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System): If the
SERVICE ABS message is displayed when you
are driving, stop as soon as possible and turn the
ignition off. Then start the engine again to reset the
system. If the message stays on, or comes back
on again while you are driving, your vehicle is in need
of service. If the regular brake system warning light
is not on, you still have brakes, but do not have anti-lock
brakes. If the regular brake system light is also on,
you do not have anti-lock brakes and there is a problem
with your brakes. See Brake System Warning Light
on page 3-38.
If the SERVICE ABS message is being displayed,
your Traction Control System and the Active Handling
System will also be disabled. The Driver Information
Center will scroll three messages: SERVICE ABS,
SERVICE TRACTION SYS and SERVICE ACTIVE
HNDLG, and the instrument cluster car icon will
be illuminated. The driver can acknowledge these
messages by pressing the reset button three times.
When the service message is displayed the computer
controlled systems will not assist the driver and you
should have the system repaired as soon as possible.
Adjust your driving accordingly.
SERVICE ACTIVE HANDLING: If the SERVICE
ACTIVE HNDLG message is displayed, there is a
problem with your Active Handling System and your
vehicle needs service. The instrument cluster light
will also be on and a chime will sound. When this
message is displayed, the system is not working.
Adjust your driving accordingly.
SERVICE COLUMN LOCK (Manual Transmission
Only): If the system that controls the locking and
unlocking of the steering column does not work properly,
have the vehicle towed to a dealer for service.
SERVICE RIDE CONTROL: This message is used to
indicate to the driver that the Selective Ride Control
system has detected a malfunction and that the system
must be serviced. The SERVICE RIDE CONTROL
message will always come on when a failure is detected
by the Selective Ride Control system. If a fault is
present in the Selective Ride Control system which
causes the shocks to be in their full soft condition, the
SERVICE RIDE CONTROL, SHOCKS INOPERATIVE
and MAXIMUM SPEED 80 MPH (129 km/h) will
display together. You will never get a SHOCKS
INOPERATIVE and MAXIMUM SPEED 80 MPH
(129 km/h) message without a SERVICE RIDE
CONTROL message.
3-65
SERVICE TIRE MON SYS (Except Z06): If this
message comes on, a part on the Tire Pressure
Monitor (TPM) is not working properly. If you drive
your vehicle while any of the four sensors are missing or
inoperable, the warning will come on in about 10 minutes.
If all four sensors are missing, the warning will come on in
about 15 to 20 minutes. All the sensors would be missing,
for example, if you put different wheels on your vehicle
without transferring the sensors. If the warning comes on
and stays on, there may be a problem with the TPM.
See your dealer.
SERVICE TRACTION SYSTEM: If the SERVICE
TRACTION SYS message is displayed when you are
driving, there is a problem with your Traction Control
System and your vehicle is in need of service. When this
message is displayed, the system will not limit wheel
spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
The SERVICE ACTIVE HNDLG message will also be
displayed and the instrument cluster car icon will also be
illuminated. The driver can acknowledge both messages
by pressing the reset button two times which will also
3-66
turn off the instrument cluster icon. When the service
messages are displayed, the computer controlled
systems will not assist the driver in controlling the
vehicle. Have the system repaired as soon as possible.
Adjust your driving accordingly.
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON: If this message appears
on the DIC, there may be an electrical or another system
problem with your vehicle. Have your vehicle checked
by your dealer if this message keeps appearing.
SHOCKS INOPERATIVE: You will hear four chimes
when this message is displayed. To acknowledge
that you have read the message and to remove it from
the display, press RESET. The message will reappear
every 10 minutes until this condition changes.
This message indicates that a malfunction is present in
the Selective Ride Control system which is causing
the shocks to be in their full soft mode. This is a warning
to the driver that the vehicle handling may be affected.
Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible.
TRAC/ACT HNDLG – OFF: By pressing the Active
Handling System console button briefly, the driver can
turn the Traction Control and Active Handling Systems
off. The message TRAC/ACT HNDLG – OFF will be
displayed in the DIC, the instrument panel cluster light
will be on and a chime will sound. You can acknowledge
this message by pressing the RESET button. The
anti-lock brake systems remains on with the Traction
Control and Active Handling Systems off. You should
adjust your driving accordingly.
TRAC/ACT HNDLG – ON: If the Traction Control and
Active Handling Systems are off, pressing the Active
Handling System console button momentarily will
turn both systems on. The message TRAC/ACT
HNDLG – ON will be displayed temporarily in the DIC,
the instrument panel cluster light will be off and a
chime will sound.
TRACTION SYS ACTIVE: When your Traction Control
System is limiting wheel spin, the TRACTION SYS
ACTIVE message will be displayed. Slippery road
conditions may exist if this message is displayed,
so adjust your driving accordingly. The message will
stay on for a few seconds after the Traction Control
System stops limiting wheel spin.
TRACTION SYSTEM – OFF: You will hear a single
quick tone when this message is displayed. This
message comes on and stays on when the Traction
Control System button on the console is pressed to turn
the system off. To acknowledge this message, press
RESET.
TRACTION SYSTEM – ON: This message is displayed
when you decide to turn on the Traction Control
System by pressing the switch on the console.
This message will shut off automatically on its own.
WARM UP COMPLETE: If you receive this message
and hear a chime, the system has completed the
functional check of the Active Handling System.
3-67
Other Messages
Here are more messages that you can receive on your
Driver Information Center (DIC). To acknowledge a
message and read another message that may have
come on at the same time, press the RESET button.
• BRAKE BEFORE SHIFT
(See “Automatic Transmissions Only” under
Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2-25.)
• CHANGE OIL NOW
(See “GM Oil Life System™” under Engine Oil on
page 5-13.)
• CHANGE OIL SOON
(See “GM Oil Life System™” under Engine Oil on
page 5-13.)
• CRUISE DISENGAGED
(See “Cruise Control” under Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-6.)
• CRUISE SET_MPH (_km/h)
(See “Cruise Control” under Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-6.)
• DOOR AJAR
3-68
• ENGINE PROTECTION REDUCE ENGINE RPM
• HATCH AJAR (Coupe)
• HIGH VOLTAGE
(See Voltmeter Gage on page 3-37.)
• LOW BRAKE FLUID
(See “Brake Fluid” under Brakes on page 5-37.)
• LOW FUEL
(See Fuel Gage on page 3-46.)
• LOW VOLTAGE
(See Voltmeter Gage on page 3-37.)
• LOW WASHER FLUID
(See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-36.)
• RESERVE FUEL
(See Fuel Gage on page 3-46.)
• TONNEAU AJAR (Convertible)
• TRUNK AJAR (Convertible/Z06)
• UPSHIFT NOW
(See Manual Transmission Operation on page 2-28.)
Audio System(s)
Notice: Before you add any sound equipment to
your vehicle – like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone or two-way radio – be sure you can
add what you want. If you can, it’s very important to
do it properly. Added sound equipment may
interfere with the operation of your vehicle’s engine,
radio or other systems, and even damage them.
Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with the
operation of sound equipment that has been added
improperly.
So, before adding sound equipment, check with
your dealer and be sure to check federal rules
covering mobile radio and telephone units.
Your audio system has been designed to operate easily
and to give years of listening pleasure. You will get
the most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with
it first. Figure out which radio you have in your vehicle,
find out what your audio system can do and how to
operate all of its controls to be sure you’re getting the
most out of the advanced engineering that went into it.
Your vehicle may have a feature called Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP, you can play your
audio system even after the ignition is turned off.
See “Retained Accessory Power (RAP)” under Ignition
Positions on page 2-20.
Setting the Time
Press and hold HR until the correct hour appears on
the display. Press and hold MN until the correct minute
appears on the display.
3-69
Radio with Cassette
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system
on and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease volume.
RECALL: Press this button to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time.
Time display is available with the ignition turned off.
Your vehicle is equipped with six Bose® amplified
speakers. See your dealer for details.
3-70
SCV (Speed-Compensated Volume): With SCV,
your audio system adjusts automatically to make up for
road and wind noise as you drive.
Set the volume at the desired level. Turn the control ring
behind the power knob clockwise to increase the SCV.
Each notch on the control ring allows for more volume
compensation at faster vehicle speeds. Then, as you
drive, SCV automatically increases the volume, as
necessary, to overcome noise at any speed. The volume
level should always sound the same to you as you drive.
If you do not want to use SCV, turn the control all the
way down.
Finding a Station
Setting Preset Stations
AM FM: Press this button to switch between FM1,
FM2, and AM. The display will show your selection.
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to
your favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations
(six FM1, six FM2, and six AM) by performing the
following steps:
TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to
select radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored
position when you are not using it.
1. Turn the radio on.
Press the right or the left arrow to go to
the next or to the previous station and stay there.
2. Press AM FM to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
To scan stations, press either SEEK arrow for two
seconds. SCAN will appear on the display. The radio will
go to a station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
next station. Press either SEEK arrow again to stop
scanning.
4. Press AUTO TONE to select the equalization.
o SEEK p:
The radio will seek or scan only to stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
3. Tune in the desired station.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons. The sound will mute. When the sound
returns, release the pushbutton. Whenever you
press that numbered pushbutton, the station you set
will return and the equalization that you selected will
be automatically stored for that pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
P.SCAN (Preset Scan): Press this button to scan your
preset stations. P.SCAN will appear on the display.
The radio will go to the first preset station stored on your
pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then go on to
the next preset station. Press P.SCAN again or one of
the pushbuttons to stop scanning presets.
The radio will scan only to preset stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
3-71
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
BASS: To adjust the bass, press this knob lightly so it
extends. Turn the knob to increase or to decrease bass.
BAL (Balance): To adjust the balance between the
right and the left speakers, press this knob lightly so
it extends. Turn the knob to move the sound toward the
right or the left speakers.
TREB (Treble): To adjust the treble, press this knob
lightly so it extends. Turn the knob to increase or
to decrease treble. If a station is weak or noisy,
you may want to decrease the treble.
Return these knobs to their stored positions when you
are not using them.
AUTO TONE (Automatic Tone): Press this button to
select customized equalization settings designed
for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.
To return the bass and treble to the manual mode,
either press and release the AUTO TONE button until
the display goes blank or press and release the BASS or
TREB knob and turn it until the display goes blank.
3-72
FADE: To adjust the fade between the front and the
rear speakers, press this knob lightly so it extends.
Turn the knob to move the sound toward the front or the
rear speakers.
Return these knobs to their stored positions when you
are not using them.
Playing a Cassette Tape
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes
that are up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side.
Tapes longer than that are so thin they may not work
well in this player. The longer side of the tape visible
should face to the right. If the ignition is on, but the radio
is off, the tape can be inserted and will begin playing.
A tape symbol will appear on the display whenever
a tape is inserted. If you hear nothing or hear a garbled
sound, it may not be in squarely. Press EJECT to
remove the tape and start over.
While the tape is playing, use the VOL, AUTO TONE,
BAL, FADE, BASS, and TREB controls just as you
do for the radio. Other controls may have different
functions when a tape is inserted. The display will show
the tape symbol and an arrow to show which side of
the tape is playing.
Your tape bias is set automatically when a metal or
chrome tape is inserted. If you want to insert a
tape when the ignition is off, first press the EJECT or
RECALL button.
If an error appears on the display, see “Cassette Tape
Messages” later in this section.
1 PREV (Previous): Your tape must have at least three
seconds of silence between each selection for previous
to work. Press this pushbutton to go to the previous
selection on the tape if the current selection has been
playing for less than eight seconds. If pressed when
the current selection has been playing for more
than eight seconds, it will go to the beginning of the
current selection. If you hold this pushbutton or press it
more than once, the player will continue moving
backward through the tape.
2 PROG (Program): Press this pushbutton to play the
other side of the tape.
3-73
3 NEXT: Your tape must have at least three seconds
of silence between each selection for next to work.
Press this pushbutton to go to the next selection on
the tape. If you hold this pushbutton or press it
more than once, the player will continue moving forward
through the tape.
4 REV (Reverse): Press this pushbutton to reverse the
tape rapidly. Press it again to return to playing speed.
The radio will play while the tape reverses.
W 5 (Dolby®): Press this pushbutton to reduce
background noise. The double-D symbol will appear
on the display.
Dolby® Noise Reduction is manufactured under a
license from Dolby® Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
Dolby® and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby® Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
FWD 6 (Forward): Press this pushbutton to advance
the tape rapidly. Press it again to return to playing
speed. The radio will play while the tape advances.
3-74
o SEEK p: Your tape must have at least three
seconds of silence between each selection for seek to
work. Press the right or the left arrow to go to the next or
to the previous selection on the tape.
AM FM: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
cassette tape is playing. The inactive tape will remain
safely inside the radio for future listening.
TAPE AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a
cassette tape when listening to the radio. The tape
symbol with an arrow will appear on the display. If your
system is equipped with a remote playback device,
pressing this button a second time will allow the remote
device to play.
EJECT: Press this button to remove the tape. EJECT
may be used with the ignition or radio off. Cassettes may
be loaded with the radio off if this button is pressed
first. If you leave a cassette tape in the player while
listening to the radio, it may become warm.
Cassette Tape Messages
CD Adapter Kits
The cassette tape player is able to detect a tight or
broken tape, and will eject the tape. The radio will
go back to playing the last station selected. Try a known
good cassette tape.
It is possible to use a portable CD player with your
cassette tape player after activating the bypass feature
on your tape player.
CLN (Clean): If this message appears on the display,
the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will
still play tapes, but you should clean it as soon as
possible to prevent damage to the tapes and player.
See Care of Your Cassette Tape Player on page 3-88.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your dealer. If your radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to
your dealer when reporting the problem.
To activate the bypass feature, use the following steps:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TAPE AUX button for five
seconds. The tape symbol on the display will
flash for two seconds, indicating the feature is
active.
4. Insert the adapter into the cassette slot. It will
power up the radio and begin playing.
The override feature will remain active until EJECT
is pressed.
3-75
Radio with CD
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system
on and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease volume.
RECALL: Press this button to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time.
Time display is available with the ignition turned off.
Your vehicle is equipped with six Bose® amplified
speakers. See your dealer for details.
3-76
SCV (Speed-Compensated Volume): With SCV,
your audio system adjusts automatically to make up for
road and wind noise as you drive.
Set the volume at the desired level. Turn the control ring
behind the power knob clockwise to increase the SCV.
Each notch on the control ring allows for more volume
compensation at faster vehicle speeds. Then, as you
drive, SCV automatically increases the volume, as
necessary, to overcome noise at any speed. The volume
level should always sound the same to you as you drive.
If you do not want to use SCV, turn the control all the
way down.
Finding a Station
Setting Preset Stations
AM FM: Press this button to switch between FM1,
FM2, and AM. The display will show your selection.
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to
your favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations
(six FM1, six FM2, and six AM) by performing the
following steps:
TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to
select radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored
position when you are not using it.
o SEEK p:
Press the right or the left arrow to go to
the next or to the previous station and stay there.
To scan stations, press either SEEK arrow for two
seconds. SCAN will appear on the display. The radio
will go to a station, play for a few seconds, then go on
to the next station. Press either SEEK arrow again
to stop scanning.
The radio will seek or scan only to stations that are in
the selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM FM to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO TONE to select the equalization.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons. The sound will mute. When the sound
returns, release the pushbutton. Whenever you
press that numbered pushbutton, the station you set
will return and the equalization that you selected
will be automatically stored for that pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
P.SCAN (Preset Scan): Press this button to scan
your preset stations. P.SCAN will appear on the display.
The radio will go to the first preset station stored on
your pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then go on to
the next preset station. Press P.SCAN again or one
of the pushbuttons to stop scanning presets.
The radio will scan only to preset stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
3-77
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
BASS: To adjust the bass, press this knob lightly so it
extends. Turn the knob to increase or to decrease bass.
BAL (Balance): To adjust the balance between the
right and the left speakers, press this knob lightly so it
extends. Turn the knob to move the sound toward
the right or the left speakers.
TREB (Treble): To adjust the treble, press this knob
lightly so it extends. Turn the knob to increase or
to decrease treble. If a station is weak or noisy, you
may want to decrease the treble.
Return these knobs to their stored positions when you
are not using them.
AUTO TONE (Automatic Tone): Press this button to
select customized equalization settings designed
for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.
To return the bass and treble to the manual mode,
either press and release the AUTO TONE button until
the display goes blank or press and release the BASS or
TREB knob and turn it until the display goes blank.
3-78
FADE: To adjust the fade between the front and the
rear speakers, press this knob lightly so it extends.
Turn the knob to move the sound toward the front or the
rear speakers.
Return these knobs to their stored positions when you
are not using them.
Playing a CD
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player will pull it in. The CD should begin playing.
CD and the CD symbol will appear on the display. If you
want to insert a CD with the ignition off, first press the
EJECT or the RECALL button.
If you turn off the ignition or radio with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When you turn on the
ignition or radio, the CD will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
As each new track starts to play the track number will
appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 8 cm single CDs
with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller CDs
are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. You may experience an
increase in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or
difficulty in loading and ejecting. If these problems occur
try a known good CD.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
Do not play 3 inch CDs without a standard adapter CD.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to
the start of the current track if it has been playing
for more than eight seconds. If you hold this pushbutton
or press it more than once, the player will continue
moving backward through the CD.
2 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order.
RANDOM will appear on the display. Press this
pushbutton again to turn off random play.
3 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track.
If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than once,
the player will continue moving forward through the CD.
REV 4 (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
quickly reverse within a track. Release it to play
the passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear
on the display.
3-79
FWD 6 (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
quickly advance within a track. Release it to play
the passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear
on the display.
o SEEK p:
Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current or to the previous track. Press the right arrow
to go to the start of the next track. If you hold either arrow
or press it more than once, the player will continue
moving backward or forward through the CD.
RECALL: Press this button to see which track is
playing. Press it again within five seconds to see
how long it has been playing (elapsed time).
AM FM: Press this button to listen to the radio when
a CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
when listening to the radio. CD will appear on the display
when a CD is in the player. If your system is equipped
with a remote playback device, pressing this button
a second time will allow the remote device to play.
EJECT: Press this button to eject the CD. The radio
will play. EJECT may be activated with the ignition
or radio off. CDs may be loaded with the radio off if
this button is pressed first. If you leave the CD in the
player while listening to the radio, it may become warm.
3-80
CD Messages
ERR (Error): If this message appears on the display,
and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smooth, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• It is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
Press RECALL to make ERR go off of the display.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If your radio displays an
error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
Trunk-Mounted CD Changer
If your vehicle has the optional trunk-mounted CD
changer it is located in the rear center storage
compartment. See Rear Storage Area on page 2-42 for
more information.
With the trunk-mounted CD changer you can play up to
12 CDs continuously. Normal size CDs may be played
using the trays supplied in the magazine. The small CDs
(8 cm) can be played only with specially designed trays.
Notice: Heavy objects in the center storage area
which may shift or slide while driving could damage
your CD changer. Protect your CD changer by not
placing heavy, moveable objects in the center
storage area.
You must first load the magazine with CDs before you
can play a CD. Each of the 12 trays holds one CD.
Press the button on the back of the magazine and
pull gently on one of the trays. Load the trays from
bottom to top, placing a CD on the tray label side down.
If you load a CD label side up, the CD will not play
and an error will occur. Gently push the tray back into
the magazine slot. Repeat this procedure for loading
up to 12 CDs in the magazine.
3-81
Once you have loaded the CDs in the magazine, slide
open the door of the CD changer. Push the magazine
into the changer in the direction of the arrow marked on
top of the magazine.
3-82
Close the door by sliding it all the way to the left. If the
door is left partially open, the changer will not operate
and an error will occur. When the door is closed,
the changer will begin checking for CDs in the
magazine. This will continue for up to two minutes
depending on the number of CDs loaded.
To eject the magazine from the player, slide the CD
changer door all the way open. The magazine will
automatically eject. Remember to keep the door closed
whenever possible to keep dirt and dust from getting
inside the changer.
Operating the Trunk-Mounted CD
Changer with the Radio with Cassette
Whenever a CD magazine with CDs is loaded in the
changer, the CD symbol will appear on the radio display.
If the CD changer is checking the magazine for CDs, the
CD symbol will flash on the display until the changer is
ready to play. When a CD begins playing, CD will appear
in the bottom left corner and a CD and track number will
appear on the radio display. The CD numbers are listed
on the front of the magazine.
The following pushbuttons are used for the
trunk-mounted CD changer.
All of the CD functions are controlled by the radio
pushbuttons except for ejecting the magazine.
2 PROG (Program): Press this pushbutton to select
the next CD in the magazine. If a CD cannot be played,
its number will be skipped when selecting CDs while
using this pushbutton.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to
the start of the current track if it has been playing
for more than eight seconds. If you hold this pushbutton
more than once, the player will continue moving
backward through the CD.
3 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track.
If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than
once, the player will continue moving forward through
the CD.
REV 4 (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton
to quickly reverse within a track. Release it to play the
passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear
on the display.
3-83
W 5 (Dolby®): This pushbutton has no function when
playing a CD.
Operating the Trunk-Mounted CD
Changer with the Radio with CD
FWD 6 (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
quickly advance within a track. Release it to play
the passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear
on the display.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
RECALL: Press this button to see what track is
currently playing. Press it again within five seconds to
see how long the track has been playing (elapsed time).
o SEEK p: The left arrow works the same as the
PREV pushbutton and the right arrow works the
same as the NEXT pushbutton.
The following pushbuttons are used for the
trunk-mounted CD changer.
1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to
the start of the current track if it has been playing
for more than eight seconds. If you hold or press this
pushbutton more than once, the player will continue
moving back through the CD.
P.SCAN (Preset Scan): Press this button to play the
tracks on all of the CDs in random, rather than
sequential, order. RDM will appear on the display.
Press this button again to turn off random play.
2 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to play the
CDs in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM will
appear on the display. Press this pushbutton again
to turn off random play.
AM/FM: Press this button to listen to the radio when
a cassette tape or a CD is playing. The inactive tape
or CD will remain safely inside the radio for future
listening.
3 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track.
If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than
once, the player will continue moving forward through
the CD.
TAPE AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
when listening to the radio. You can also press this
button to switch between playing a tape in the cassette
tape player and playing a CD in the trunk-mounted
CD changer, if both are loaded.
REV 4 (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
quickly reverse within a track. Release it to play
the passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear
on the display.
3-84
5: Press this pushbutton to select the next CD in the
magazine. If a CD cannot be played, its number will be
skipped when selecting CDs while using this pushbutton.
FWD 6 (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
quickly advance within a track. Release it to play
the passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear
on the display.
RECALL: Press this button to see what track is
currently playing. Press it again within five seconds to
see how long the track has been playing (elapsed time).
o SEEK p: The left arrow works the same as the
PREV pushbutton and the right arrow works the
same as the NEXT pushbutton.
AM/FM: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a
CD when listening to the radio. You can also press
this button to switch between playing a CD in the CD
player and playing a CD in the trunk-mounted
CD changer, if both are loaded.
CD Messages
If an error occurs while trying to play a CD in the
CD player or changer, the following conditions may
have caused the error:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smooth, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour
and try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
• The CD changer door is open. Completely close
the changer door to restore normal operation.
• An empty magazine is in the CD changer.
Try the magazine again with a CD loaded on
one of the trays.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If your radio displays an
error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
3-85
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of your
radio. It works by using a secret code to disable all radio
functions whenever battery power is interrupted.
The THEFTLOCK feature for the radio may be used or
ignored. If ignored, the system plays normally and
the radio is not protected by the feature. If THEFTLOCK
is activated, your radio will not operate if stolen.
When THEFTLOCK is activated, LOC will appear on the
radio display to indicate a locked condition anytime
battery power has been interrupted. If your battery loses
power for any reason, you must unlock the radio with
the secret code before it will operate.
1. Write down any three or four-digit number from
000 to 1999 and keep it in a safe place separate
from the vehicle.
2. Turn the ignition on.
3. Turn the radio off.
4. Press the 1 and 4 pushbuttons at the same time.
Hold them down until --- shows on the display.
Next you will use the secret code number which you
have written down.
5. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
6. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree
with your code.
Activating the Theft-Deterrent Feature
7. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
The instructions which follow explain how to enter
your secret code to activate the THEFTLOCK system.
Read through all nine steps before starting the
procedure.
8. Press AM FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written
down. The display will show REP to let you know
that you need to repeat Steps 5 through 7 to confirm
your secret code.
If you allow more than 15 seconds to elapse between
any steps, the radio automatically reverts to time
and you must start the procedure over at Step 4.
9. Press AM FM and this time the display will show
SEC to let you know that your radio is secure.
3-86
Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature
After a Power Loss
Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
1. Turn the ignition on. LOC will appear on the
display.
2. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
3. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree
with your code.
4. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
5. Press AM FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written
down. The display will show SEC, indicating
the radio is now operable and secure.
If you enter the wrong code eight times, INOP will
appear on the display. You will have to wait an hour
with the ignition on before you can try again. When you
try again, you will only have three chances to enter
the correct code before INOP appears.
If you lose or forget your code, contact your dealer.
Disabling the Theft-Deterrent Feature
Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press the 1 and 4 pushbuttons at the same time.
Hold them down until SEC appears on the display.
4. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
5. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree
with your code.
6. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
7. Press AM FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written
down. --- will appear on the display, indicating that
the radio is no longer secured.
If the code entered is incorrect, SEC will appear on the
display. The radio will remain secured until the correct
code is entered.
When battery power is removed and later applied to a
secured radio, the radio won’t turn on and LOC will
appear on the display.
To unlock a secured radio, see “Unlocking the
Theft-Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss” earlier
in this section.
3-87
Radio Reception
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range, however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick
up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try
reducing the treble to reduce this noise.
FM
FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,
causing the sound to come and go.
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes, or a damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight, and
extreme heat. If they are not, they may not operate
properly or may cause failure of the tape player.
Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after
every 50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLN to
indicate that you have used your tape player for
50 hours without resetting the tape clean timer.
3-88
If this message appears on the display, your cassette
tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to your tapes and player. If you notice
a reduction in sound quality, try a known good
cassette to see if the tape or the tape player is at fault.
If this other cassette has no improvement in sound
quality, clean the tape player.
For best results, use a scrubbing action, non-abrasive
cleaning cassette with pads which scrub the tape
head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn. The
recommended cleaning cassette is available through
your dealer.
The cut tape detection feature of your cassette tape
player may identify the cleaning cassette as a damaged
tape, in error. To prevent the cleaning cassette from
being ejected, use the following steps:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TAPE AUX button for five
seconds. The tape symbol on the display will
flash for two seconds.
4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.
5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s
recommended cleaning time.
After the cleaning cassette is ejected, the cut tape
detection feature will be active again.
Care of Your CDs
You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type
cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to
clean the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette will
not eject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner
may not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type
cleaner. The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type
cleaning cassette is not recommended.
Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original
cases or other protective cases and away from direct
sunlight and dust. If the surface of a CD is soiled,
dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent
solution and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
After you clean the player, press and hold the EJECT
button for five seconds to reset the CLN indicator.
The radio will display --- or CLEANED to show the
indicator was reset.
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality
may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette
tape is in good condition before you have your tape
player serviced.
Be sure never to touch the side without writing when
handling CDs. Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges
or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
Care of Your CD Player
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised,
due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics
with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
Fixed Mast Antenna (Z06)
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged. If the mast should ever
become slightly bent, you can straighten it out by hand.
If the mast is badly bent, you should replace it.
Check occasionally to be sure the mast is still tightened
to the rear quarter panel.
3-89
Power Antenna Mast Care
(Convertible)
Your power antenna will look its best and work well
if it is cleaned from time to time. To clean the antenna
mast do the following:
1. Turn on the ignition and radio to raise the antenna.
2. Dampen a clean cloth with mineral spirits or
equivalent solvent.
3. Wipe the cloth over the mast sections, removing
any dirt.
4. Wipe dry with a clean cloth.
5. Make the antenna go up and down by turning the
radio or ignition off and on.
6. Repeat if necessary.
Notice: If you lubricate the power antenna, you may
damage it. Always follow the cleaning instructions
listed in this manual to keep the power antenna
working properly.
3-90
Notice: Before entering an automatic car wash,
turn off your radio to make the power antenna
go down. This will prevent the mast from possible
damage. If the antenna does not go down when you
turn the radio off, it may be damaged or need to
be cleaned. In either case, lower the antenna
by hand by carefully pressing the antenna down.
If the mast portion of your antenna is damaged, you can
replace it. See your dealer for a replacement kit and
follow the instructions in the kit.
Integrated Windshield and Rear
Window Antennas (Coupe)
The antennas in your vehicle are located in the
windshield and the rear window. The front connector is
at the top of the windshield and the rear antenna is
incorporated in the rear window defogger grid.
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting
with metallic film. The metallic film in some tinting
materials will interfere with or distort the incoming
radio reception. Any damage caused to your
backglass antenna due to metallic tinting materials
will not be covered by your warranty.
Section 4
Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2
Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2
Drunken Driving .............................................4-3
Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-6
Braking .........................................................4-6
Traction Control System (TCS) .........................4-9
Active Handling System .................................4-10
Limited-Slip Rear Axle ...................................4-12
Selective Ride Control ...................................4-12
Steering ......................................................4-14
Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-16
Passing .......................................................4-16
Loss of Control .............................................4-18
Driving at Night ............................................4-19
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-20
City Driving ..................................................4-23
Freeway Driving ...........................................4-24
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-25
Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-26
Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-26
Winter Driving ..............................................4-28
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow ..............................................4-32
Towing ..........................................................4-33
Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-33
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-33
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-33
Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-38
4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 1-6.
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to
be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do. Be ready for their mistakes.
4-2
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following
distance. It is the best defensive driving maneuver,
in both city and rural driving. You never know when the
vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn suddenly.
Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate
on the driving task. Anything that distracts from
the driving task — such as concentrating on a cellular
telephone call, reading, or reaching for something on the
floor — makes proper defensive driving more difficult
and can even cause a collision, with resulting injury.
Ask a passenger to help do things like this, or pull off the
road in a safe place to do them yourself. These simple
defensive driving techniques could save your life.
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It is the number one contributor
to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive
a vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Judgment
Muscular Coordination
Vision
Attentiveness.
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with more than
300,000 people injured.
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population — choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,
it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol
and then drive. But what if people do? How much is
“too much” if someone plans to drive? It is a lot less than
many might think. Although it depends on each person
and situation, here is some general information on
the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol.
4-3
According to the American Medical Association, a 180 lb
(82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml)
bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC
of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin or vodka.
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example,
if the same person drank three double martinis
(3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the
person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person
who consumes food just before or during drinking will
have a somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
have a lower relative percentage of body water
than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this
means that a woman generally will reach a higher
BAC level than a man of her same body weight will
when each has the same number of drinks.
The law in an increasing number of U.S. states, and
throughout Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.
In some other countries, the limit is even lower.
For example, it is 0.05 percent in both France and
Germany. The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in
the United States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen,
it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks,
and how quickly the person drinks them.
4-4
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night.
All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above
0.05 percent. Statistics show that the chance of being
in a collision increases sharply for drivers who have
a BAC of 0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC
level of 0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance
of having a collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent,
the chance of this driver having a collision is 12 times
greater; at a level of 0.15 percent, the chance is
25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not the
right answer. What if there is an emergency, a need
to take sudden action, as when a child darts into
the street? A person with even a moderate BAC
might not be able to react quickly enough to avoid
the collision.
There is something else about drinking and driving that
many people do not know. Medical research shows
that alcohol in a person’s system can make crash
injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal
cord or heart. This means that when anyone who has
been drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash,
that person’s chance of being killed or permanently
disabled is higher than if the person had not been
drinking.
{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and
judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Please do not drink and drive or ride with a
driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a
cab; or if you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
4-5
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
You have three systems that make your vehicle go where
you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and
the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work at
the places where the tires meet the road.
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That is perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second. But that is
only an average. It might be less with one driver and as
long as two or three seconds or more with another.
Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination and
eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and
frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle moving
at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). That could
be a lot of distance in an emergency, so keeping enough
space between your vehicle and others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road (whether it is pavement
or gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy);
tire tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of
the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice,
it is easy to ask more of those control systems than the
tires and road can provide. That means you can lose
control of your vehicle. Also see Traction Control System
(TCS) on page 4-9 and Active Handling System on
page 4-10.
4-6
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool
between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brake
normally but do not pump your brakes. If you do,
the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes. ABS is an advanced
electronic braking system that will help prevent a
braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive away,
your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You
may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while
this test is going on, and you may even notice that your
brake pedal moves a little. This is normal.
If there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system,
this warning light will
stay on. See Anti-Lock
Brake System Warning
Light on page 3-39.
4-7
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and
road conditions. This can help you steer around
the obstacle while braking hard.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you.
You slam on the brakes and continue braking.
Here is what happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each wheel.
4-8
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time you
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always
decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to
the vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to apply
your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even
though you have anti-lock brakes.
Using Anti-Lock
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may
hear a motor or clicking noise and feel the brake pedal
move a little during a stop, but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more
than even the very best braking.
Traction Control System (TCS)
Your vehicle has a traction control system called TCS
that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery
road conditions. The system operates only if it senses
that the rear wheels are spinning too much or are
beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the
system works the rear brakes and reduces engine power
(by closing the throttle and managing engine spark) to
limit wheel spin.
The TRACTION SYS ACTIVE message will come on
when the TCS system is limiting wheel spin. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-58. You may feel or
hear the system working, but this is normal.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the TCS system
begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise control will
automatically disengage. When road conditions allow
you to safely use it again, you may re-engage the cruise
control. See Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-6.
4-9
The SERVICE TRACTION
SYSTEM message and
the TCS warning light will
come on to let you
know if there is a problem
with your TCS system.
See DIC Warnings
and Messages on
page 3-58.
When this light and the SERVICE TRACTION SYSTEM
message are on, the system will not limit wheel spin.
Adjust your driving accordingly.
The TCS system automatically comes on whenever you
start your vehicle. To limit wheel spin, especially in
slippery road conditions, you should always leave the
system on. But you can turn the TCS system off if
you ever need to.
To turn the system off,
press the button located
on the console. You can
turn the system on or off at
any time by pressing the
ACTIVE HANDLING
button. The DIC will display
the appropriate message
when you push the button.
4-10
Active Handling System
The Active Handling System is a computer controlled
system that helps the driver maintain directional control
of the vehicle in difficult driving conditions. This is
accomplished by selectively applying any one of the
vehicle’s brakes.
When you first start your vehicle and begin to drive away
(6 mph (10 km/h)), the message ACT HNDLG WARMING
UP may be displayed in the DIC, the instrument cluster
light will be on, and a chime will sound. This is normal.
You can acknowledge this message by pressing the
RESET button. The Active Handling System performance
is affected until the message, WARM UP COMPLETE,
is displayed in the DIC.
The ACT HNDLG WARMING UP message may be
displayed in the DIC after exceeding 12 mph (20 km/h)
for 30 seconds. The Active Handling System is off
until the WARM UP COMPLETE message is displayed.
The ACTIVE HANDLING message will come on when the
system is operating. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-58 for more information. You may also feel or
hear the system working. This is normal.
The SERVICE ACTIVE
HNDLG message will be
displayed, the instrument
cluster light will come on,
and a chime will sound to
let you know if there is a
problem with the system.
See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-58
for more information.
When this light and the SERVICE ACTIVE HNDLG
message are on, the system is not operational.
Adjust your driving accordingly.
The Active Handling System comes on automatically
whenever you start your vehicle. To help maintain
directional control of the vehicle, you should always
leave the system on. You can turn the system off if you
ever need to. If you turn the Active Handling System
off, the Traction Control System will also be turned off.
Adjust your driving accordingly.
To turn the system off,
press the ACTIVE
HANDLING button on the
console. You can turn
the system on and off at
any time by pressing
the button. The DIC will
display the appropriate
message when you push
the button.
4-11
Competitive Driving Mode
Limited-Slip Rear Axle
The driver can select this optional handling mode by
pressing the ACTIVE HANDLING button on the console
for more than five seconds. A chime will sound and
COMPETITIVE DRIVING will be displayed in the DIC.
Competitive Driving mode allows the driver to have
full control of the rear wheels while the Active Handling
System helps steer the vehicle by selective brake
application. The instrument cluster light will not be on.
The Traction Control System will not be operating.
Adjust your driving accordingly.
Your limited-slip rear axle can give you additional traction
on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works like a
standard axle most of the time, but when one of the rear
wheels has no traction and the other does, this feature
will allow the wheel with traction to move the vehicle.
When you press the ACTIVE HANDLING button again,
or turn the ignition to ACC, the Active Handling and
Traction Control Systems will be on. The TRAC/ACT
HNDLG-ON message will be displayed temporarily in the
DIC and a chime will be heard.
4-12
Selective Ride Control
You may have a ride control system on your vehicle
called Selective Ride Control. The system provides the
following performance benefits:
•
•
•
•
•
Reduced Impact Harshness
Improved Road Isolation
Improved High-Speed Stability
Improved Handling Response
Better Control of Body Ride Motions
TOUR: Use for normal city and highway driving.
This setting provides a smooth, soft ride.
SPORT: Use where road conditions or personal
preference demand more control. This setting provides
more “feel”, or response to the road conditions.
You can select a setting at any time. Based on road
conditions, steering wheel angle and your vehicle speed,
the system automatically adjusts to provide the best
ride and handling. Select a new setting whenever driving
conditions change.
This knob is located on the center console. Turn it to
select the suspension of your choice.
There are three Driver Information Center (DIC)
messages that are displayed when a malfunction occurs
with the Selective Ride Control system. Refer to DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-58.
4-13
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
Magnetic Speed Variable Assist
Steering
Your vehicle is equipped with a steering system that
continuously adjusts the effort you feel when steering at
all vehicle speeds. It provides ease when parking,
yet a firm, solid feel at highway speeds.
Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction.
If you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice,
you will understand this.
4-14
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you are
in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems — steering and acceleration — have to do
their work where the tires meet the road. Adding
the sudden acceleration can demand too much of those
places. You can lose control. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 4-9.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you
want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions.
Under less favorable conditions you will want to go
slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a
curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can
avoid these problems by braking — if you can stop in
time. But sometimes you can not; there is not room.
That is the time for evasive action — steering around the
problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes.
See Braking on page 4-6. It is better to remove as much
speed as you can from a possible collision. Then
steer around the problem, to the left or right depending
on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-15
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off
the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re driving.
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger
can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
• “Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel
to go straight down the roadway.
4-16
and to crossroads for situations that might affect
your passing patterns. If you have any doubt
whatsoever about making a successful pass,
wait for a better time.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.
A broken center line usually indicates it is all
right to pass (providing the road ahead is clear).
Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or
a double solid line, even if the road seems empty
of approaching traffic.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you are awaiting an opportunity. For one
thing, following too closely reduces your area of
vision, especially if you are following a larger
vehicle. Also, you will not have adequate space
if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep
back a reasonable distance.
• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and
do not get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into
the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you
will have a “running start” that more than makes up
for the distance you would lose by dropping
back. And if something happens to cause you to
cancel your pass, you need only slow down
and drop back again and wait for another
opportunity.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,
• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough
ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in
your inside mirror, activate your right lane change
signal and move back into the right lane.
(Remember that your right outside mirror is convex.
The vehicle you just passed may seem to be
farther away from you than it really is.)
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on
two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing,
it may be slowing down or starting to turn.
• If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps
you can ease a little to the right.
wait your turn. But take care that someone is not
trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow
vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder
and check the blind spot.
4-17
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems (brakes,
steering and acceleration) do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not “overdriving”
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid only
the acceleration skid. If your TCS system is off, then
an acceleration skid is also best handled by easing your
foot off the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel or other material is on the road. For safety,
you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction,
try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration or
braking (including engine braking by shifting to a
lower gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires
to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice or packed snow
on the road to make a “mirrored surface” — and slow
down when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
4-18
Driving at Night
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
• Since you can not see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But as we get older these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your night
vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes will
have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you are driving,
do not wear sunglasses at night. They may cut down on
glare from headlamps, but they also make a lot of things
invisible.
4-19
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even
several seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark.
When you are faced with severe glare (as from a
driver who does not lower the high beams, or a
vehicle with misaimed headlamps), slow down a little.
Avoid staring directly into the approaching headlamps.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your
vehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night is made
much worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of
the glass can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass
makes lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass
would, making the pupils of your eyes contract
repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your
eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should
be checked regularly for proper aim, so should your
eyes be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from
night blindness — the inability to see in dim light — and
are not even aware of it.
4-20
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a
wet road, you can not stop, accelerate or turn as well
because your tire-to-road traction is not as good as
on dry roads. And, if your tires do not have much tread
left, you will get even less traction. It is always wise
to go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while
you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when
your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy rain
can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals,
pavement markings, the edge of the road and even
people walking.
It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in
good shape and keep your windshield washer tank
filled with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper
inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing
areas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start
to separate from the inserts.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems,
too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid
puddles. But if you can not, try to slow down before
you hit them.
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will not
work as well in a quick stop and may cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly
until your brakes work normally.
4-21
Hydroplaning
Driving Through Flowing Water
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
If you try to drive through flowing water, as you
might at a low water crossing, your vehicle
can be carried away. As little as six inches of
flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle.
If this happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not ignore police
warning signs, and otherwise be very cautious
about trying to drive through flowing water.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure is
one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is
standing on the road. If you can see reflections
from trees, telephone poles, or other vehicles, and
raindrops “dimple” the water’s surface, there could be
hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.
There just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake and badly damage
your engine. Never drive through water that is
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle.
If you can not avoid deep puddles or standing water,
drive through them very slowly.
4-22
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
• Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
•
distance. And be especially careful when you
pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear
room ahead, and be prepared to have your
view restricted by road spray.
Have good tires with proper tread depth.
See Tires on page 5-55.
City Driving
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into
an unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and energy.
See Freeway Driving on page 4-24.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough
to need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles
that have not cleared the intersection or may
be running the red light.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
4-23
Freeway Driving
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to
the freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as
you drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin
to check traffic. Try to determine where you expect
to blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close
to the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal,
check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as
often as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the
traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in
your “blind” spot.
Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the
safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
The most important advice on freeway driving is:
Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the
same speed most of the other drivers are driving.
Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.
Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
4-24
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance.
Expect to move slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit,
do not, under any circumstances, stop and back up.
Drive on to the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted. Reduce your speed
according to your speedometer, not to your sense
of motion. After driving for any distance at higher
speeds, you may tend to think you are going slower
than you actually are.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you are not fresh — such as after
a day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles that
first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing
and shoes you can easily drive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course, you
will find experienced and able service experts in GM
dealerships all across North America. They will be ready
and willing to help if you need it.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full?
Are all windows clean inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a
short time to avoid a major storm system?
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
4-25
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Is there actually such a condition as “highway hypnosis”?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the
wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy.
Do not let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can
leave the road in less than a second, and you could
crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis?
First, be aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service or parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
on the highway as an emergency.
4-26
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.
{CAUTION:
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down. They could
get so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Always have
your engine running and your vehicle in gear
when you go downhill.
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system
and transmission. These parts can work hard
on mountain roads.
• Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, your brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You would
then have poor braking or even none going
down a hill. You could crash. Shift down to let
your engine assist your brakes on a steep
downhill slope.
• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down to
•
•
•
a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine
and transmission, and you can climb the hill better.
Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let
you stay in your own lane.
As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could
be something in your lane, like a stalled car or an
accident.
You may see highway signs on mountains that warn
of special problems. Examples are long grades,
passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks area or
winding roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate
action.
4-27
Winter Driving
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.
4-28
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if
you will be driving under severe conditions, include a
small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple of
burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you
properly secure these items in your vehicle.
Driving On Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet
the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You
will have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to be
very careful.
What is the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet
ice can be even more trouble because it may offer
the least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is
about freezing (32°F; 0°C) and freezing rain begins to
fall. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and
sand crews can get there.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow — drive with caution.
Keep your traction control system on. It improves your
ability to accelerate when driving on a slippery road.
Even though your vehicle has the TCS system, you will
want to slow down and adjust your driving to the road
conditions. The Active Handling System may also
activate. See Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 4-9 and Active Handling System on page 4-10.
Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stop on a slippery road.
Even though you have the anti-lock braking system,
you will want to begin stopping sooner than you would
on dry pavement. See Braking on page 4-6.
• Allow greater following distance on any slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On an
otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun can not reach: around
clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass
may remain icy when the surrounding roads are
clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you, brake
before you are on it. Try not to brake while you are
actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering
maneuvers.
4-29
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags,
floor mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.
4-30
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You can not see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get
and it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine
again and repeat this only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as
possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can.
To help keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle
and do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour
or so until help comes.
4-31
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you do not want to
spin your wheels too fast. The method known as
“rocking” can help you get out when you are stuck,
but you must use caution.
{CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can
explode, and you or others could be injured.
And, the transmission or other parts of the
vehicle can overheat. That could cause an
engine compartment fire or other damage.
When you are stuck, spin the wheels as little as
possible. Do not spin the wheels above 35 mph
(55 km/h) as shown on the speedometer.
Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of
your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the
wheels too fast while shifting your transmission
back and forth, you can destroy your transmission.
For information about using tire chains on your
vehicle, see Tire Chains on page 5-71.
4-32
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will
clear the area around your front wheels. You should turn
your TCS System off. See Traction Control System
(TCS) on page 4-9. Then shift back and forth between
REVERSE (R) and a forward gear, spinning the
wheels as little as possible. For a manual transmission,
shift slowly between either FIRST (1) or SECOND (2)
and REVERSE (R), allowing the wheels to stop
before shifting into gear. Release the accelerator pedal
while you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator
pedal when the transmission is in gear. By slowly
spinning your wheels in the forward and reverse
directions, you will cause a rocking motion that may free
your vehicle. If that does not get you out after a few
tries, you may need to be towed out. If you do need to
be towed out, see Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-33.
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service
if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed.
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6.
Loading Your Vehicle
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants,
cargo and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels
on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly
carry, the Tire and Loading Information label and the
Certification label.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle — such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly towing”
(towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with any
of its wheels on the ground. If your vehicle must
be towed, see “Towing Your Vehicle” earlier in this
section.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can
break, and it can change the way your vehicle
handles. These could cause you to lose
control and crash. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
4-33
Tire and Loading Information Label
Example 2
Example 1
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight
4-34
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight
The Tire and Loading Information label shows the
seating capacity and the total weight your vehicle can
properly carry. This weight is called the vehicle capacity
weight. If your vehicle has the Tire and Loading
Information label, Example 1, the label is attached to
the center pillar, near the driver’s door latch. If your
vehicle has the Tire-Loading Information label,
Example 2, the label is on the rear edge of the
driver’s door.
The Tire and Loading Information label also gives you
the size and recommended inflation pressure for
the factory-installed, original equipment tires on your
vehicle. For more information on tires and inflation see
Tires on page 5-55 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-62.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the
“XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
There is also important loading information on the
Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) for the front and rear axle; see “Certification
Label” later in this section.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight
may not safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX
pounds” on your vehicle placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
Your vehicle is neither designed nor intended to tow
a trailer.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
4-35
Example 1
Example 2
Loading Your Vehicle
Item
Description
Loading Your Vehicle
Total
Item
Description
Total
A
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 1 =
400 lbs (181 kg)
A
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 2 =
400 lbs (181 kg)
B
Subtract Occupant Weight
150 lbs (68 kg) x 1 =
150 lbs (68 kg)
B
Subtract Occupant Weight
150 lbs (68 kg) x 2 =
300 lbs (136 kg)
C
Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight =
250 lbs (113 kg)
C
Available Cargo Weight =
100 lbs (45 kg)
4-36
Certification Label
Example 3
Loading Your Vehicle
Item
Description
Total
A
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 3 =
400 lbs (181 kg)
B
Subtract Occupant Weight
200 lbs (91 kg) x 2 =
400 lbs (181 kg)
C
Available Cargo Weight =
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label
for specific information about your vehicle’s capacity
weight and seating positions. The combined weight of
the driver, passengers and cargo should never
exceed your vehicle’s capacity weight.
The other label is the Certification label, found on the
rear edge of the driver’s door. It tells you the gross
weight capacity of your vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the
weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front or
rear axle.
4-37
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread it
out. Do not carry more than 100 lbs. (45 kg) in your
rear area.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can
break, and it can change the way your vehicle
handles. These could cause you to lose
control and crash. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
If you put things inside your vehicle – like suitcases,
tools, packages or anything else – they will go as fast as
the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly,
or if there is a crash, they will keep going.
4-38
{CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
• Put things in the rear area of your vehicle.
Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them
are above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
Towing a Trailer
Your Corvette is neither designed nor intended to tow a
trailer.
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Service ............................................................5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of Your Vehicle ...........................................5-4
Fuel ................................................................5-4
Gasoline Octane ............................................5-4
Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-5
California Fuel ...............................................5-5
Additives .......................................................5-6
Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-6
Filling Your Tank ............................................5-7
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .....................5-10
Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-10
Hood Release ..............................................5-11
Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12
Engine Oil ...................................................5-13
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-18
Automatic Transmission Fluid .........................5-20
Manual Transmission Fluid .............................5-21
Hydraulic Clutch ...........................................5-22
Engine Coolant .............................................5-23
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ..................5-26
Engine Overheating .......................................5-26
Cooling System ............................................5-29
Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-35
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-36
Brakes ........................................................5-37
Battery ........................................................5-40
Jump Starting ...............................................5-41
Rear Axle .......................................................5-47
Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-48
Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-48
Headlamps ..................................................5-48
Taillamps and Turn Signal Lamps ...................5-50
Back-Up Lamps ............................................5-52
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-52
Tires ..............................................................5-55
Extended Mobility Tires (Except Z06) .................5-61
Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-62
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation (Except Z06) .....5-64
Tire Rotation ................................................5-65
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-65
Buying New Tires .........................................5-66
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-67
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-68
5-1
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Wheel Replacement ......................................5-68
Tire Chains ..................................................5-71
Lifting Your Vehicle .......................................5-71
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-75
Tire Inflator Kit (Z06 Only) .............................5-77
Appearance Care ............................................5-82
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .................5-83
Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-85
Weatherstrips ...............................................5-85
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle ..............5-85
Finish Damage .............................................5-89
Carbon Fiber Hood (Z06 Commemorative
Edition Model Only) ...................................5-89
Magnesium Wheel Finish ...............................5-89
Underbody Maintenance ................................5-89
5-2
Titanium Exhaust System (Z06 Only) .................5-89
Fiberglass Springs ........................................5-90
Chemical Paint Spotting .................................5-90
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ..................5-90
Vehicle Identification ......................................5-91
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................5-91
Service Parts Identification Label .....................5-92
Electrical System ............................................5-92
Add-On Electrical Equipment ..........................5-92
Headlamp Wiring ..........................................5-92
Windshield Wiper Fuses ................................5-92
Power Windows and Other Power Options .......5-92
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ............................5-93
Capacities and Specifications ..........................5-99
Service
Doing Your Own Service Work
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealer
for all your service needs. You will get genuine GM parts
and GM-trained and supported service people.
If you want to do some of your own service work, you
will want to use the proper service manual. It tells
you much more about how to service your vehicle than
this manual can. To order the proper service manual,
see Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 7-11.
Your vehicle may have an air bag system. If it does, see
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-49
before attempting to do your own service work.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See Maintenance Record on page 6-15.
We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
5-3
CAUTION:
(Continued)
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. “English” and “metric”
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle
can affect the airflow around it. This may cause
wind noise and affect windshield washer performance.
Check with your dealer before adding equipment to
the outside of your vehicle.
5-4
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the
proper maintenance of your vehicle.
Gasoline Octane
Use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane of
91 or higher for best performance. You may also use
middle grade or regular unleaded gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher, but your vehicle’s acceleration may
be slightly reduced. If the octane is less than 87, you
may get a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher
as soon as possible. Otherwise, you might damage
your engine.
Gasoline Specifications
California Fuel
It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications
which were developed by automobile manufacturers
around the world and contained in the World-Wide
Fuel Charter which is available from the Alliance
of Automobile Manufacturers at www.autoalliance.org.
Gasoline meeting these specifications could provide
improved driveability and emission control system
performance compared to other gasoline.
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards (see the underhood emission control label),
it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California
specifications. If this fuel is not available in states
adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle
will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may
turn on (see Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-41)
and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. If this
occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused
by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered
by your warranty.
In Canada, look for the
“Auto Makers’ Choice”
label on the pump.
Canada Only
5-5
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,
allowing your emission control system to work properly.
You should not have to add anything to your fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the minimum
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations. General Motors
recommends that you buy gasolines that are advertised
to help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean. If your
vehicle experiences problems due to dirty injectors or
valves, try a different brand of gasoline.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in
your area to contribute to clean air. General Motors
recommends that you use these gasolines, particularly if
they comply with the specifications described earlier.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage would not be covered under
your warranty.
5-6
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors does
not recommend the use of such gasolines. Fuels
containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and
the performance of the emission control system may
be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on.
If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
service.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
Filling Your Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you
and others, read and follow all the instructions
on the pump island. Turn off your engine when
you are refueling. Do not smoke if you are near
fuel or refueling your vehicle. Keep sparks,
flames and smoking materials away from fuel.
Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when
refueling your vehicle — this is against the law
in some places. Keep children away from the
fuel pump; never let children pump fuel.
The fuel filler door is located on the driver’s side of the
vehicle. The fuel cap is attached by a tether for your
convenience.
The fuel filler door release
button is located inside of
the center console
storage compartment.
5-7
If your fuel filler door release will not operate, there is a
manual release tab. The tab is located against the
upper trim on the driver’s side in the rear compartment.
Pull the tab to manually release the fuel filler door.
5-8
While refueling, rest the tether across the tab on the
fuel filler door to prevent damage to your vehicle’s finish.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly to the left
(counterclockwise). The fuel cap has a spring in it;
if you let go of the cap too soon, it will spring back
to the right.
{CAUTION:
If you spill fuel and then something ignites it,
you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray out
on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly.
This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full,
and is more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel
cap slowly and wait for any “hiss” noise to stop.
Then unscrew the cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill your
tank, and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before you remove the nozzle. Clean fuel from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Cleaning
the Outside of Your Vehicle on page 5-85.
When you put the fuel cap back on, turn it to the right
(clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make sure
you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly
installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 3-41.
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel
by shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer can get one for you.
If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.
This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to
light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions
system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 3-41.
5-9
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the gasoline vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or
on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.
5-10
{CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
Hood Release
Notice: If the hood comes into contact with the
headlamp doors when you raise the hood, you could
damage the hood and/or the headlamp doors.
Always close the headlamp doors before opening
the hood.
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the handle located
inside the vehicle below
the instrument panel on
the driver’s side.
2. Go to the side of the vehicle and pull up on the rear
edge of the hood, near the windshield.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps
are on properly. Then, just pull the hood down and close
it firmly.
5-11
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood, you will see the following:
5-12
A. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-23.
B. Battery. See Battery on page 5-40.
C. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine Oil on page 5-13.
D. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine Oil on page 5-13.
E. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18.
F. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering
Fluid on page 5-35.
G. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See Brakes on page 5-37.
H. Clutch Master Cylinder Reservoir. See Hydraulic
Clutch on page 5-22.
I. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See Windshield
Washer Fluid on page 5-36.
Engine Oil
If the LOW OIL LEVEL message on the Driver
Information Center comes on, it means you need to
check your engine oil level right away. For more
information, see Driver Information Center (DIC) on
page 3-48.
You should check your engine oil level regularly; this is
an added reminder.
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check your engine oil level every
time you get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,
the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be on
level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
Turn off the engine and give the oil a few minutes to
drain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oil dipstick
might not show the actual level.
Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or a
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again,
keeping the tip down.
5-13
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip of the
dipstick, you will need to add at least one quart of oil.
But you must use the right kind. This section explains
what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity,
see Capacities and Specifications on page 5-99.
See “Racing or Other Competitive Driving” under
Starting Your Engine on page 2-21 for additional
information on engine oil.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If your engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above
the cross-hatched area that shows the proper
operating range, your engine could be damaged.
5-14
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the
way back in when you are through.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Look for two things:
• GM4718M
Your vehicle’s engine requires a special oil meeting
GM Standard GM4718M. Oils meeting this
standard may be identified as synthetic. However,
not all synthetic oils will meet this GM standard.
You should look for and use only an oil that meets
GM Standard GM4718M.
Notice: If you use oils that do not have the
GM4718M Standard designation, you can cause
engine damage not covered by your warranty.
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle. However, you can use SAE
10W-30 if it is going to be 0°F (-18°C) or above.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
Oils meeting these
requirements should also
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has been
certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
You should look for this on the oil container, and use
only those oils that are identified as meeting GM
Standard GM4718M and have the starburst symbol on
the front of the oil container.
5-15
Your vehicle’s engine is filled at the factory with a
Mobil 1® synthetic oil, which meets all requirements
for your vehicle.
When to Change Engine Oil
(GM Oil Life System)
Substitute Engine Oil: When adding oil to maintain
engine oil level, oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M
may not be available. You can add substitute oil
designated SAE 5W-30 with the starburst symbol at all
temperatures. If temperatures are above 0°F (-18°C),
you may substitute SAE 10W-30 with the starburst
symbol. Substitute oil not meeting GM Standard
GM4718M should not be used for an oil change.
Your vehicle has a computer that lets you know when to
change your engine oil and filter. This is based on
engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on
mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change will be indicated can vary
considerably. For the oil life system to work properly,
you must reset the system every time the oil is changed.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM4718M are all you will need for good performance
and engine protection.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is necessary.
A CHANGE OIL SOON message will come on. Change
your oil as soon as possible within the next two times you
stop for fuel. It is possible that, if you are driving under the
best conditions, the oil life system may not indicate that
an oil change is necessary for over a year. However, your
engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year
and at this time the system must be reset. Your dealer
has GM-trained service people who will perform this work
using genuine GM parts and reset the system. It is also
important to check your oil regularly and keep it at the
proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
5-16
How to Reset the CHANGE OIL SOON
Message
The GM Oil Life System calculates when to change
your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use.
Anytime your oil is changed, reset the system so it can
calculate when the next oil change is required. If a
situation occurs where you change your oil prior to a
CHANGE OIL SOON message being turned on,
reset the system.
To reset the CHANGE OIL SOON message after an
oil change, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition to ON, with the engine off.
2. Press the TRIP button so the OIL LIFE percentage
is displayed.
3. Press RESET and hold for two seconds.
OIL LIFE REMAIN 100% will appear.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers,
or into streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by
taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have
a problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask your
dealer, a service station or a local recycling center
for help.
4. Turn the key to OFF.
If the CHANGE OIL SOON message comes back on
when you start your vehicle, the engine oil life system
has not reset. Repeat the procedure.
5-17
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
location of the engine air cleaner/filter.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter from
the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release
loose dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt,
a new filter is required.
To inspect or replace the filter, do the following:
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at every oil change and
replace at the first oil change after 25,000 miles
(40 000 km).
5-18
1. Pull up on the clips on each side to release the
assembly.
{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned.
The air cleaner not only cleans the air, it helps
to stop flame if the engine backfires. If it is
not there and the engine backfires, you could
be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
2. Pull the assembly out.
3. Replace the filter. See Normal Maintenance
Replacement Parts on page 6-13.
4. Push the assembly back into place.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire
can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt
can easily get into your engine, which will damage
it. Always have the air cleaner/filter in place
when you are driving.
5. Fasten the clips.
5-19
Automatic Transmission Fluid
How to Check
It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level.
A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid
loss. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to your dealer
service department and have it repaired as soon
as possible.
There is a special procedure for checking and changing
the transmission fluid. Because this procedure is
difficult, you should have this done at your dealer service
department. Contact your dealer for additional
information or the procedure can be found in the service
manual. To purchase a service manual, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-11.
Notice: We recommend you use only fluid labeled
DEXRON®-III, because fluid with that label is
made especially for your automatic transmission.
Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON®-III is
not covered by your new vehicle warranty.
5-20
Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles
(80 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one of
these conditions:
• In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
• In hilly or mountainous terrain.
• High performance operation.
If you do not use your vehicle under one of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter every
100,000 miles (166 000 km).
See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 for the proper
service intervals for the transmission fluid and filter.
Manual Transmission Fluid
Then, follow these steps:
When to Check
A good time to have it checked is when the engine oil is
changed. However, the fluid in your manual transmission
doesn’t require changing.
How to Check
Because this operation can be difficult, you may choose
to have this done at your dealership service department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage
your transmission. Too much can mean that some
of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
part or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.
Too little fluid could cause the transmission to
overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you
check your transmission fluid.
Check the fluid level only when your engine is off, the
vehicle is parked on a level place and the transmission
is cool enough for you to rest your fingers on the
transmission case.
1. Remove the filler plug.
2. Check that the lubricant level is up to the bottom of
the filler plug hole.
3. If the fluid level is good, install the plug and be sure
it is fully seated. If the fluid level is low, add more
fluid as described in the next steps.
5-21
How to Add Fluid
When to Check and What to Use
Here’s how to add fluid. Refer to the Maintenance
Schedule to determine what kind of fluid to use. See
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11.
1. Remove the filler plug.
2. Add fluid at the filler plug hole. Add only enough
fluid to bring the fluid level up to the bottom of the
filler plug hole.
3. Install the filler plug. Be sure the plug is fully seated.
4. Tighten the plug to 20 lb ft (27 Y).
Hydraulic Clutch
The hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle is
self-adjusting. The master cylinder reservoir is filled with
hydraulic fluid.
It is not necessary to regularly check the fluid unless
you suspect there is a leak in the system. Adding fluid
won’t correct a leak.
A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.
Have the system inspected and repaired.
5-22
The clutch master cylinder reservoir is located at the
rear of the engine compartment on the driver’s side.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for more information on location.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often you should check the fluid level in your master
cylinder reservoir and for the proper fluid. See Owner
Checks and Services on page 6-8 and Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11.
How to Check and Add Fluid
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add
only DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem with
engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on
page 5-26.
Fluid should be added if the fluid level is below the step
on the inside of the reservoir. There are additional
instructions on the reservoir cap. Put the rubber seal
and cap back on. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for more information on location.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
• Let the warning lights and gages work as they
should.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL®(silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
5-23
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you do
not need to add anything else.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
Notice: If you use the proper coolant, you do not
have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim
to improve the system. These can be harmful.
Checking Coolant
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts.
5-24
The coolant surge tank is located in the engine
compartment behind the passenger’s side headlamp.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for more information on location.
Adding Coolant
{CAUTION:
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. Never turn the surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the FULL
COLD mark. The FULL COLD mark is on the front
of the coolant surge tank. Do not overfill the surge tank.
Too much coolant can result in an overflow when the
fluid is hot.
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when the
engine is cool.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is
hand-tight.
5-25
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur.
Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for information on location.
Engine Overheating
You will find an engine coolant temperature gage on the
instrument panel cluster and a COOLANT OVER
TEMP message on the Driver Information Center (DIC).
See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 3-41
and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-58.
5-26
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
If an overheated engine condition exists and the
messages COOLANT OVER TEMP and REDUCED
ENGINE POWER are displayed, along with the Check
Engine light, an overheat protection mode which
alternates firing groups of cylinders helps prevent engine
damage. In this mode, you will notice a loss in power
and engine performance. This operating mode
allows your vehicle to be driven to a safe place in an
emergency; you may drive up to 50 miles (80 km).
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting any repair.
The engine oil will be severely degraded. Repair the
cause of coolant loss, change the oil and reset the oil
life system. See Engine Oil on page 5-13.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
CAUTION:
(Continued)
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.
You or others could be badly burned. Stop
your engine if it overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.
See “Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode” under Engine Overheating on page 5-26
for information on driving to a safe place in an
emergency.
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood.
Stay away from the engine if you see or hear
steam coming from it. Just turn it off and get
CAUTION:
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. See “Overheated
Engine Protection Operating Mode” under Engine
Overheating on page 5-26 for information on driving
to a safe place in an emergency.
(Continued)
5-27
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear
no steam, the problem may not be too serious.
Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:
• Climb a long hill on a hot day.
• Stop after high-speed driving.
• Idle for long periods in traffic.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,
shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let the
engine idle.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the window as necessary.
5-28
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning does not come back on, you can drive
normally.
If the warning continues and you are not stopped,
pull over, stop, and park your vehicle right away.
If there is still no sign of steam, you can idle the engine
for three minutes while you are parked. If you still
have the warning, turn off the engine and get everyone
out of the vehicle until it cools down. Also, see
“Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode” listed
previously in this section.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what
you will see:
{CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood
can start up even when the engine is not
running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling,
do not do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle
should be parked on a level surface.
A. Electric Engine Cooling Fans
B. Coolant Surge Tank
5-29
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the
vehicle.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check
to see if the electric engine cooling fans are running.
If the engine is overheating, both fans should be
running. If they are not, your vehicle needs service.
The coolant level should be at or above the FULL COLD
mark. If it is not, you may have a leak at the pressure cap
or in the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water
pump or somewhere else in the cooling system.
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them.
If you do, you can be burned.
CAUTION:
5-30
(Continued)
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty.
See “Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode” in the Index for information on driving to a
safe place in an emergency.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL®(silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
If you have not found a problem yet, check to see if
coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant is visible
but the coolant level is not at the FULL COLD mark
on the coolant surge tank, add a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant at the
coolant surge tank, but be sure the cooling system,
including the coolant surge tank pressure cap, is cool
before you do it. See Engine Coolant on page 5-23
for more information.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Never turn the cap when the cooling system,
including the coolant surge tank pressure cap,
is hot. Wait for the cooling system and coolant
surge tank pressure cap to cool if you ever
have to turn the pressure cap.
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant
as follows:
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly.
They are under pressure, and if you turn the
coolant surge tank pressure cap — even a
little — they can come out at high speed.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
5-31
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
5-32
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface. You can remove
the coolant surge tank pressure cap when the
cooling system, including the coolant surge tank
pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer
hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise
about one-quarter turn and then stop.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means
there is still some pressure left.
3. Then fill the coolant surge tank with the proper
mixture, to the FULL COLD mark on the coolant
surge tank.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and
remove it.
5-33
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the engine
cooling fan(s).
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank
until the level reaches the FULL COLD mark on
the coolant surge tank.
5-34
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
Power Steering Fluid
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Turn the key off, let the engine compartment cool down,
wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean, then
unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag.
Replace the cap and completely tighten it. Then remove
the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick.
There are markings on both sides of the dipstick.
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark.
If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the
level up to the mark.
• When the engine
compartment is hot,
the level should be at
the HOT mark.
• When the engine
compartment is cool,
the level should be at
the FULL COLD mark.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for reservoir location.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
5-35
Windshield Washer Fluid
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be
operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature
may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing.
Adding Washer Fluid
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12
for reservoir location.
Add washer fluid until the
tank is full.
5-36
Notice:
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding
water.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
• Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it is very cold. This allows for
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage your washer
system and paint.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you should have
your brake system fixed, since a leak means that
sooner or later your brakes will not work well, or will not
work at all.
So, it is not a good idea to “top off” your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you will have too
much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should
add (or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
{CAUTION:
Your brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with DOT-3
brake fluid. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for the location of the reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level
in the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake
fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid
level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system. See “Checking Brake Fluid”
in this section.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
to check your brake fluid. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
5-37
Checking Brake Fluid
You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap.
Just look at the brake fluid reservoir. The fluid level
should be above the MIN mark on the reservoir. If it is
not, have your brake system checked to see if there
is a leak.
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,
make sure the level is between the MIN and
MAX marks.
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Refer to Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-11. Use new brake fluid from a sealed
container only.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help keep dirt
from entering the reservoir.
5-38
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or they
may not even work at all. This could cause a
crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
system parts. For example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your
brake system can damage brake system parts so
badly that they will have to be replaced. Do not
let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged.
Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your
vehicle. If you do, wash it off immediately.
See Appearance Care on page 5-82.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make a
high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are
worn and new pads are needed. The sound may come
and go or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving
(except when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly).
{CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon your brakes will not work well. That
could lead to an accident. When you hear the
brake wear warning sound, have your vehicle
serviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
As you make brake stops, your disc brakes
automatically adjust for wear.
Z06 models are equipped with high performance front
brake linings designed for improved brake performance
under severe use. They will normally exhibit some
low speed noise and you may notice an increase in the
amount of brake dust.
5-39
Replacing Brake System Parts
Battery
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together
if the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality GM brake parts.
When you replace parts of your braking system — for
example, when your brake linings wear down and you
need new ones put in — be sure you get new approved
GM replacement parts. If you do not, your brakes may no
longer work properly. For example, if someone puts in
brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance
between your front and rear brakes can change — for the
worse. The braking performance you have come to
expect can change in many other ways if someone puts
in the wrong replacement brake parts.
Your new vehicle comes with a maintenance free
ACDelco® battery. When it is time for a new battery,
get one that has the replacement number shown on
the original battery’s label. We recommend an
ACDelco® battery.
5-40
For battery replacement, see your dealer or the service
manual. To purchase a service manual, see Service
and Owner Publications in Service Publications Ordering
Information on page 7-11.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
Vehicle Storage
Jump Starting
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days
or more, remove the black, negative (-) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
If your battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. Be sure to follow the steps below to do it safely.
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
are not careful. See Jump Starting on page 5-41
for tips on working around a battery without
getting hurt.
Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your
vehicle for longer storage periods.
Also, for your audio system, see Theft-Deterrent
Feature on page 3-86.
{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or
all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: If you try to start your vehicle by pushing
or pulling it, you could damage your vehicle. Do not
push or pull your vehicle to start it; instead, use
the jump starting procedure in this manual to start
your vehicle when the battery has run down.
5-41
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved
in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmission
in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brakes.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or in the accessory power outlet. Turn off
the radio and all lamps that are not needed. This will
avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And it
could save your radio!
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on
each vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for more information on location.
{CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from
any underhood electric fan.
5-42
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the ACDelco® battery
installed in your new vehicle. But if a battery
has filler caps, be sure the right amount of
fluid is there. If it is low, add water to take care
of that first. If you do not, explosive gas could
be present.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose
or missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged, too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts, too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
5-43
7. Do not let the other end
touch metal. Connect it
to the positive (+)
terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
5-44
8. Now connect the black
negative (−) cable to
the negative (−)
terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote
negative (−) terminal
if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable at
least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts that move. The electrical
connection is just as good there, and the chance
of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
5-45
Notice: If the jumper cables are removed in the
wrong order, electrical shorting may occur and
damage the vehicle. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Remove the jumper
cables in the correct order, making sure that the
cables do not touch each other or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles,
do the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
other vehicle.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part
B. Good Battery
C. Dead Battery
5-46
Rear Axle
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
When to Check Lubricant
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you will need to add some lubricant. Add enough
lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler
plug hole.
It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
How to Check Lubricant
What to Use
To add lubricant when the level is low, use SAE 75W-90
Synthetic Gear Lubricant (GM Part No. 12378261) or
equivalent meeting GM Specification 9986115.
To completely refill after draining, add 4 ounces
(118 ml) of Limited-Slip Differential Lubricant Additive
(GM Part No. 1052358) or equivalent. Then fill to the
bottom of the filler plug hole with the Synthetic Gear
Lubricant.
5-47
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulb, see Bulb
Replacement on page 5-48.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer’s service department.
Headlamps
1. The headlamp doors need to be halfway open.
Turn the headlamps on, then quickly back to the
parking lamps setting. You may have to do
this a few times to get the half-open position.
Halogen Bulbs
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.
You can also open the headlamp doors manually
by turning the adjuster counterclockwise.
5-48
2. Remove the screws on each side of the headlamp
bezel.
3. Open the hood.
4. To remove the bezel, pull the sides slightly outward
and tilt the bezel forward. Pull the clip centered
above the lens outward. Be careful not to scratch
the paint on the vehicle.
5. Reach behind the lamp and turn the bulb
counterclockwise to remove it. Don’t touch the
halogen bulbs. The inner bulb is the high beam
and the outer bulb is the low beam.
6. Disconnect the desired bulb from the wiring harness.
7. Reverse the steps listed previously with a new bulb.
5-49
Taillamps and Turn Signal Lamps
1. Remove the screws.
A. Back-Up Lamp
B. Inboard Taillamp
C. Outboard Taillamp
5-50
2. Pull the taillamp housing assembly out.
3. To remove the socket with the bulb, squeeze the
tab while you turn the socket counterclockwise.
4. Remove the bulb from the socket.
5. Reverse the steps listed previously with a new bulb.
5-51
Back-Up Lamps
You can access the back-up lamps through the inboard
taillamp opening. See Taillamps and Turn Signal Lamps
on page 5-50.
1. Squeeze the tab on the socket while turning it
counterclockwise to remove it from the assembly.
2. Remove the bulb from the socket.
3. Reverse the steps listed previously with a new bulb.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Bulb Number
High-Beam Headlamp
9005
Low-Beam Headlamp
9006
Back-Up
2057
Rear Stop/Tail and Turn Signal
3057
For any bulb replacements or procedures not listed
here, please consult your dealer.
5-52
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected each time
maintenance is performed. See “Wiper Blade Check”
under Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 for
more information.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. For the proper type and
length, see Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
on page 6-13.
It is a good idea to clean or replace the wiper blade
assembly every six months.
Notice: Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch the
windshield when no wiper blade is installed
could damage the windshield. Any damage that
occurs would not be covered by your warranty.
Do not allow the wiper blade arm to touch the
windshield.
To remove the wiper blade assembly, do the following:
1. Open the hood to gain access to the windshield
wipers.
2. Lift the wiper arm until it locks into a vertical
position.
A. Blade Assembly
B. Arm Assembly
C. Locking Tab
3. Press down on the blade assembly pivot locking
tab (C). Pull down on the blade assembly (A) to
release it from the wiper arm hook (F).
4. Remove the insert from the blade assembly (A).
The insert has two notches at one end that are
locked by the bottom claws of the blade assembly.
At the notch end, pull the insert from the blade
assembly.
D. Blade Pivot
E. Hook Slot
F. Arm Hook
5-53
To install the new wiper insert:
3. Put the blade assembly pivot in the wiper arm
hook. Pull up until the pivot locking tab locks in
the hook slot.
4. Carefully lower the wiper arm and blade assembly
onto the windshield.
Installation guide:
1. Slide the insert (D), notched end last, into the end
with the two blade claws (A). Slide the insert all
the way through the blade claws at the opposite
end (B). Plastic caps (C) will be forced off as
the insert is fully installed.
2. Be sure the notches are locked by the bottom
claws. Make sure that all other claws are properly
locked on both sides of the insert slots.
A. Claw in Notch
B. Correct Installation
C. Incorrect Installation
5-54
Tires
CAUTION:
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additional
information refer to the tire manufacturer’s booklet
included with your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual.
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
•
{CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See “Loading Your
Vehicle” in the Index.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
(Continued)
•
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The following illustration shows an example
of a passenger car tire sidewall.
5-55
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Tire Size
Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
Department of Transportation (DOT)
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Tire Ply Material
Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type and
service description. See the “Tire Size ” illustration later
in this section for more detail.
(B) Tire Performance Criteria Specification
(TPC Spec): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
(C) Department of Transportation (DOT): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
5-56
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and
plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured.
The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although
only one side may have the date of manufacture.
Tire Size Codes
The following illustration shows an example of a typical
passenger car tire size.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on
three performance factors: treadwear, traction and
temperature resistance. For more information see
Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-67.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load. For more information on
recommended tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-62 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-33.
A. P-Metric Tire
B. Tire Width
C. Aspect Ratio
D. Construction Code
E. Rim Diameter
F. Service Description
(A) P-Metric Tire: The United States version of a
metric tire sizing system. The letter “P” as the
first character in the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U. S.
Tire and Rim Association.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the
tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.
5-57
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates the
tire height-to-width measurements. For example, if the
tire size aspect ratio is “70,” as shown in item “C” of the
illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall is 70%
as high as it is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The letter
“R” means radial ply construction; the letter “D” means
diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter “B”
means belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
(F) Service Description: These characters represent
the load range and the speed rating of a tire. The load
range represents the load carrying capacity a tire is
certified to carry. The load index can range from 1 to 279.
The speed rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified
to carry a load. Speed ratings range from “A” to “Z”.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure
is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight
of optional accessories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power seats, and air
conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height to
its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made
from steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by
steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are
laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)
before a tire has built up heat from driving.
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-62.
5-58
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor
vehicle with standard and optional equipment including
the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a
tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation motor vehicle safety
standards. The DOT code includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator which can
also identify the tire manufacturer, production plant,
brand and date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, see Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-33.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front
axle, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-33.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,
see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-33.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
There are 6.9 kPa’s to one psi.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty
trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279
that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The
maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curb
weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight;
and production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants
a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 pounds
(68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-33.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of a asymmetrical
tire that has a particular side that faces outward
when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire that
contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears
manufacturer, brand and or model name molding that
is higher or deeper than the same moldings on the other
sidewall of the tire.
5-59
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger
cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure and
shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-62 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-33.
Radial Ply tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords
that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire
beads are seated.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called “wear bars,” that show across the tread of a tire
when only 2/32 inch of tread remains. See When It
Is Time for New Tires on page 5-65.
UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards, a tire
information system that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature and treadwear.
Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are molded
into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Quality
Grading on page 5-67.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated
seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs. (68 kg) plus
the rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-33.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a
tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire
can operate.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,
occupant weight and cargo weight.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the road
surface. The amount of grip provided.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the original equipment tire size
and recommended inflation pressure. See Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-33.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road.
5-60
Extended Mobility Tires (Except Z06)
Your vehicle, when new, had Goodyear Extended
Mobility Tires (EMT). There’s no spare tire, no tire
changing equipment and no place to store a tire in the
vehicle. Extended Mobility Tires perform so well without
any air that a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) is used to alert
you if a tire has lost pressure.
If a tire goes flat, you won’t need to stop on the side of the
road to change the tire. You can just keep on driving.
The shorter the distance you drive and the slower the
speed, the greater the chance that the tire will not have to
be replaced. If you drive on a deflated EMT for 50 miles
(80 km) or less and at speeds of 55 mph (90 km/h) or
less, there is a good chance that the tire can be repaired.
The tire can operate effectively with no air pressure for up
to 200 miles (320 km) at speeds up to 55 mph (90 km/h),
but the tire would then have to be replaced. When a tire is
filled with air, it provides a cushion between the road and
the wheel. Because you won’t have this cushion when
driving on a deflated tire, try to avoid potholes that could
damage your wheel and require replacement of it.
Some road hazards can damage a tire beyond repair.
This damage could occur even before you’ve driven on
the tire in a deflated condition. When a tire has been
damaged, or if you’ve driven any distance on a deflated
EMT, check with an authorized Goodyear EMT Service
Center to determine whether the tire can be repaired or
should be replaced. To maintain your vehicle’s extended
mobility feature, all replacement tires must be Extended
Mobility Tires. As soon as possible, contact the nearest
authorized GM or Goodyear EMT servicing facility for
inspection and repair or replacement. To locate the
nearest GM or Goodyear EMT servicing facility, call
Roadside Assistance. For phone numbers and Roadside
Assistance details see Roadside Assistance Program on
page 7-6. You may also contact Goodyear, for the
nearest authorized EMT servicing facility, by calling
1-800-789-9878.
{CAUTION:
Extended mobility tires are constructed
differently than other tires and could explode
during improper service. You or others could
be injured or killed if you attempt to repair,
replace, dismount, or mount a extended
mobility tire. Let only an authorized EMT
Service Center repair, replace, dismount and
mount extended mobility tires.
5-61
The valve stems on your extended mobility tires
have sensors that are part of the Tire Pressure
Monitor (TPM). See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
(Except Z06) on page 5-64. The TPM sensors contain
batteries which are designed to last for 10 years
under normal driving conditions. See your dealer if you
ever need to have a wheel replaced, or if the sensors
ever need replacement.
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Notice: Using liquid sealants can damage the tire
valves and tire pressure monitor sensors in your
extended mobility tires. This damage would not be
covered by warranty. Don’t use liquid sealants
in your extended mobility tires.
Notice: Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation
or overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires
don’t have enough air (underinflation), you can get
the following:
• Too much flexing
If you feel that winter tires are needed for your driving
conditions, Goodyear Eagle M+S EMT tires are available
in your original equipment sizes from an authorized
Goodyear EMT retailer. These tires will improve snow
traction while maintaining your vehicle’s extended
mobility feature. When using winter tires on your vehicle,
be sure to use them on all four wheels. See Buying
New Tires on page 5-66.
The tire and loading information label, shows the correct
inflation pressures for your tires when they’re cold.
“Cold” means your vehicle has been sitting for at least
three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-33, for the location
of your vehicle’s tire and loading information label.
•
•
•
•
•
Too much heat
Tire overloading
Bad wear
Bad handling
Bad fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (overinflation),
you can get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Bad handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
5-62
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are underinflated.
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a
pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure
matches the recommended pressure on the tire and
loading information label, no further adjustment is
necessary. If the inflation pressure is low, add air until
you reach the recommended amount.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure
Monitor, you can check tire inflation pressures while
driving. After you’ve reached a speed of 15 mph
(24 kmh) or more, press and release the GAGES button
on the Driver Information Center (DIC) until the front
tire pressures are displayed. Then, press and release
the GAGES button for the rear tire pressures. If the
display doesn’t show tire pressure, or if the SERVICE
TIRE MON SYS message appears see your dealer
for service. For more information, see Tire Pressure
Monitor Operation (Except Z06) on page 5-64 and Driver
Information Center (DIC) on page 3-48.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the
metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gage.
5-63
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
(Except Z06)
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
The Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) has a sensor on
each road wheel that transmits to a receiver on
the instrument panel.
If a tire’s inflation pressure is between 5 psi (35 kPa)
and 25 psi (170 kPa), you will see a message on
the Driver Information Center. This message will show
which tire is underinflated and two chimes will sound.
An example would be LOW TIRE PRESSURE-LR.
This would mean that the inflation pressure in your
left rear tire is between 5 psi (35 kPa) and 25 psi
(170 kPa). If the inflation pressure in the tire drops below
5 psi (35 kPa), the message would read FLAT TIRE-LR
and four chimes will sound. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 3-48.
The system operates on a radio frequency subject to
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
with Industry and Science Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS–210 of Industry and
Science Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
5-64
The TPM will also alert you if a tire’s pressure is higher
than 42 psi (290 kPa). The message will show which tire
is overinflated and two chimes will sound. An example
would be HIGH PRESSURE-LR. This would mean that
the inflation pressure in your left rear tire is higher than
42 psi (290 kPa). See Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 3-48.
If a tire pressure message appears on the Driver
Information Center, stop as soon as you can. Have the
tire pressures checked and set to those shown on
your Tire-Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 5-62.
{CAUTION:
When the LOW TIRE PRESSURE or FLAT TIRE
message is displayed on the Driver Information
Center, your vehicle’s handling capabilities will
be reduced during severe maneuvers. If you
drive too fast, you could lose control of your
vehicle. You or others could be injured.
Don’t drive over 55 mph (90 km/h) when the
LOW TIRE PRESSURE or FLAT TIRE message
is displayed. Drive cautiously, and check your
tire pressures as soon as you can.
Tire Rotation
The tires on your vehicle are different sizes front to rear.
Due to this, your tires should not be rotated. Each tire
and wheel should be used only in the position it is in.
When It Is Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it’s
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
5-65
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires your vehicle
needs, look at the Tire and Loading Information label.
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-33, for an example
of the label and where it is located on your vehicle.
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had a
Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,
GM recommends that you get tires with that same TPC
Spec number. That way your vehicle will continue to
have tires that are designed to give proper endurance,
handling, load range, speed rating, traction, ride, tire
pressure monitoring system performance and other
things during normal service on your vehicle. If your tires
have an all-season tread design, the TPC number will be
followed by an “MS” (for mud and snow).
If you ever replace your tires with those not having a
TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same
size, load range, speed rating and construction type
(bias, bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes
(other than those originally installed on your
vehicle) or types (radial and bias-belted tires),
the vehicle may not handle properly, and you
could have a crash. Using tires of different
sizes (other than those originally installed on
your vehicle) may also cause damage to your
vehicle. Be sure to use the correct size and
type tires on all four wheels.
If your vehicle is equipped with Extended Mobility Tires
and you feel that winter tires are needed, see Extended
Mobility Tires (Except Z06) on page 5-61.
{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
5-66
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1.5) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices
and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance.
(This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,
tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
5-67
Temperature – A, B, C
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature
can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are
not needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or
your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment
may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle
vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels
may need to be rebalanced.
Wheel Replacement
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
5-68
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts or
wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance and tire clearance to the
body and chassis.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause a crash. When you change
a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places
where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an
emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper
towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper
or wire brush later, if you need to, to get all the
rust or dirt off.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or the threads
of the wheel nuts. If you do, the wheel nuts
might come loose and the wheel could fall off,
causing a crash.
5-69
Magnesium Wheels
{CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become
loose and even come off. This could lead to a
crash. Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts.
If you have to replace them, be sure to get new
GM original equipment wheel nuts.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification.
Notice: If your vehicle has magnesium wheels,
moisture on or around the mounting surface of the
magnesium wheel will cause corrosion and damage
to the wheel. To help prevent this, a magnesium
wheel uses two rubber O-rings. One goes on the
inboard side of the wheel and the other on the back
of the center hubcap. When you put a magnesium
wheel back on, be sure the O-rings are correctly
installed. On the inboard side, of the wheel, work the
O-ring into the groove. When properly installed, this
O-ring fits snugly. The other O-ring goes around the
retaining legs of the center cap.
Used Replacement Wheels
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used
or how far it’s been driven. It could fail suddenly
and cause a crash. If you have to replace a
wheel, use a new GM original equipment wheel.
5-70
Tire Chains
Lifting Your Vehicle
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Don’t use tire chains. There’s not enough
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle without
the proper amount of clearance can cause
damage to the brakes, suspension or other
vehicle parts. The area damaged by the tire
chains could cause you to lose control of your
vehicle and you or others may be injured in a
crash. Use another type of traction device only
if its manufacturer recommends it for use on
your vehicle and tire size combination and
road conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it’s contacting your vehicle, and don’t
spin your wheels. If you do find traction devices
that will fit, install them on the rear tires.
Lifting a vehicle can cause an injury. The
vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured. Find a level place to lift your vehicle.
To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put an automatic transmission shift lever
in PARK (P), or shift a manual transmission
to FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R).
3. Turn off the engine.
To be even more certain the vehicle won’t move,
you can put blocks in front of and behind the
wheels.
5-71
{CAUTION:
If you ever use a jack to lift your Corvette, such as to
display it at a show, follow the instructions that
came with the jack, and be sure to use the correct
lifting points to avoid damaging your vehicle.
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up
is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack,
you could be badly injured or killed. Never get
under a vehicle when it is supported only by
a jack.
Notice: Lifting your vehicle improperly can damage
your vehicle and result in costly repairs not
covered by your warranty. To lift your vehicle
properly, follow the advice in this part.
To help prevent vehicle damage:
• Be sure to place a block or pad between the
jack and the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to place
the jack in the proper location before raising
the vehicle.
5-72
• Make sure the jack you’re using spans at least
two crossmember ribs.
• Lift only in the areas shown in the following
pictures.
For additional information, see your dealer and the
Chevrolet Corvette service manual.
Lifting From the Front
The front lifting point can be accessed for either the
driver’s or passenger’s side of the vehicle, behind the
front tires.
1. Locate the lifting point (B) on either side of your
vehicle to jack the vehicle according to the
illustration shown.
2. Be sure to place a block or pad between the jack
and the vehicle.
3. Lift the vehicle with the jack, making sure the jack
spans at least two of the crossmember ribs (A).
5-73
Lifting From the Rear
The rear lifting point can be accessed from the rear of
the vehicle, on either the driver’s or passenger’s side.
1. Locate the lifting point to jack your vehicle according
to the illustration shown.
2. Be sure to place a block or pad between the jack
and the vehicle.
3. Lift the vehicle with the jack, making sure the jack
spans at least two of the crossmember ribs.
For more information, see Doing Your Own Service
Work on page 5-3.
5-74
If a Tire Goes Flat
Your Corvette has no spare tire, no tire changing
equipment and no place to store a tire.
It’s unusual for a tire to “blow out” while you’re driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. See Tires
on page 5-55. If air goes out of a tire, it’s much more likely
to leak out slowly.
If your vehicle has Extended Mobility Tires (EMT),
you won’t need to stop on the side of the road to change
a flat tire. EMT tires can operate effectively with no air
pressure. If you drive on a deflated EMT for 50 miles
(80 km) or less and at speeds of 55 mph (90 km/h) or
less, there is a good chance that the tire can be repaired.
Contact the nearest authorized Chevrolet or Goodyear
EMT servicing facility, as soon as possible, to have the
flat tire inspected and repaired or replaced. For more
information, see Extended Mobility Tires (Except Z06)
on page 5-61.
{CAUTION:
Special tools and procedures are required to
service an Extended Mobility Tire (EMT). If these
special tools and procedures aren’t used you or
others could be injured and your vehicle could
be damaged. Always be sure the proper tools
and procedures, as described in the service
manual, are used.
To order a service manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 7-11.
5-75
Z06 models do not have Extended Mobility Tires. If a
Z06 model tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel
damage by driving slowly to a level place and stopping.
Then do this:
1. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
2. Set the parking brake firmly.
3. Put the shift lever (manual transmission) in
REVERSE (R).
4. Turn off the engine.
5. Inspect the flat tire.
If the tire has been separated from the wheel or has
damaged sidewalls or large tears that allow rapid
air loss, call a tire repair facility. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 7-6.
If the flat tire is due to a slow leak caused by a nail
or other similar road hazard, the tire inflator kit may be
used to repair the damaged tire temporarily. The kit
uses a liquid tire sealant to seal small punctures in the
5-76
tread area of the tire. The flat tire is then inflated to at
least 26 psi (179 kPa) and driven to evenly distribute the
tire sealant. The tire pressure is checked after driving
for a maximum of 10 minutes to see if the slow leak has
been stopped. If the tire pressure is 19 psi (131 kPa)
or more, inflate the tire up to the standard operating
pressure as shown on the Tire Pressure
Label found on the rear edge of the driver’s door.
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-62.
You should have the damaged tire repaired as soon as
possible. The tire sealant is a temporary repair only.
For more information regarding the tire inflator kit
see “Tire Inflator Kit (Z06 Only)” following this section.
Notice: If the tire pressure has dropped below
19 psi (131 kPa), the vehicle should not be driven
further. Damage to the tire may be severe and
the sealant will not be effective. Contact Roadside
Assistance. See “Roadside Assistance” in the Index.
Tire Inflator Kit (Z06 Only)
Every Z06 model with P295/35ZR18 and P265/40ZR17
tires, when new, was equipped with a tire inflator kit.
The repair kit contains a detailed instruction card
that outlines step by step the temporary repair
procedure. Be sure to read and follow all the tire inflator
kit instructions. The kit also includes:
A.
B.
C.
D.
Air Compressor
Tire Sealant
Sealant Filling Hose
Air Compressor
Accessory Plug
E. Air Compressor
Inflator Hose
F. Air Pressure Gage
G. Sealant Filling
Hose Plug
H. Valve Core Remover
I. Spare Valve Core
J. 55-mph Label
5-77
Tire Sealant
Air Compressor
The kit contains a liquid sealant that when injected into
a flat tire, may temporarily repair nail holes or cuts
in the tread area of the tire. The tire sealant cannot
repair tire damage caused while driving on a flat tire or
a tire that has had a “blow out” or a tire that has
punctures in the sidewall areas. The tire sealant solution
is a one-time use application for one tire only. Check
the tire sealant expiration date; the sealant may not be
as effective beyond the expiration date. The tire
sealant can be peeled off easily after drying.
The air compressor included in the tire inflator kit,
was designed exclusively for the Z06 Model equipped
with P295/35ZR18 and P265/40ZR17 tires. After
the sealant has been injected into the flat tire, use the
air compressor to inflate the tire to at least 26 psi
(179 kPa). Instructions for connecting and using the
air compressor are located on the air compressor.
Notice: Do not use a tire sealant if your vehicle is
equipped with Extended Mobility Tires or tire
pressure monitors. The tire sealant can damage tire
pressure monitor sensors. See “Extended Mobility
Tires” in the Index.
A. Inflating Hose
B. Air Pressure Gage
5-78
C. ON/OFF Switch
D. Air Compressor Plug
Notice: The car engine must be running to avoid
draining the battery while running the air
compressor.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
move. See Parking Your Vehicle (Manual Transmission)
on page 2-35.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
with the engine running, if the shift lever is not
in NEUTRAL (N) with the parking brake firmly
set (manual transmission). Your vehicle can
roll or move suddenly even when on fairly
level ground. To be sure your vehicle won’t
move, always set your parking brake and move
the shift lever to NEUTRAL (N) when you start
or idle your engine.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine in a closed-in place or with
the climate control system off can cause
deadly carbon monoxide (CO). See “Engine
Exhaust” in the Index.
{CAUTION:
Inflating something too much can make it
explode, and you or others could be injured.
Be sure to read the inflator instructions, and
inflate the tire to its recommended pressure.
Do not exceed 36 psi (248 kPa).
5-79
Notice: Do not allow the air compressor to operate
continuously for more than six minutes to help
prevent damage from overheating.
Place the air compressor pump and accessories into the
inflator kit case and store in the hatch/trunk
compartment area of your vehicle.
Notice: If 26 psi (179 kPa) tire pressure cannot be
reached after six minutes the vehicle should not
be driven further. Damage to the tire is severe and
the sealant will not be effective. Remove the air
compressor plug from the accessory power outlet
and unscrew the inflating hose from the tire
valve. See “Roadside Assistance” in the Index.
If 26 psi (179 kPa) tire pressure is reached in six
minutes or less, disconnect the air compressor and
attach the enclosed maximum speed label to the inside
upper left corner of the windshield or to the face of
the radio/clock.
Tire Inflator Kit Storage
The tire inflator kit is stored in the rear hatch/trunk area
of your vehicle.
The maximum speed label
reminds you to drive
cautiously and not to
exceed 55 mph (90 km/h)
until you have the
damaged tire inspected
and repaired.
1. Remove the elastic cord (A) from around the
retaining hook (B) and slide the kit out from
under the elastic band (C) that is secured to the
floor of the hatch/trunk area.
5-80
2. Unwrap the elastic cord (A) from around the handle
of the tire inflator kit. Open the tire inflator kit case
by lifting up the two tabs located on either side
of the kit handle.
To Stow the Tire Inflator Kit:
{CAUTION:
Storing the tire inflator kit or other equipment in
the passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone.
Store the tire inflator kit in the proper place.
1. Loop the elastic cord (A) around the handle of the
tire inflator kit.
5-81
Appearance Care
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous.
Some are toxic. Others can burst into flames if you
strike a match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle.
Some are dangerous if you breathe their fumes in
a closed space. When you use anything from a
container to clean your vehicle, be sure to follow the
manufacturer’s warnings and instructions. And always
open your doors or windows when you are cleaning
the inside.
Never use these to clean your vehicle:
2. Insert the tire inflator kit under the elastic band (C)
that is secured to the floor of the hatch/trunk area
of your vehicle.
3. Wrap the elastic cord (A) around the retaining
hook (B).
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Gasoline
Benzene
Naphtha
Carbon Tetrachloride
Acetone
Paint Thinner
Turpentine
Lacquer Thinner
Nail Polish Remover
They can all be hazardous — some more than
others — and they can all damage your vehicle, too.
5-82
Do not use any of these unless this manual says you
can. In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Alcohol
Laundry Soap
Bleach
Reducing Agents
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and
loose dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and painted
surfaces with a clean, damp cloth.
Cleaning Fabric/Carpet
Your dealer has cleaners for the cleaning of fabric
and carpet. They will clean normal spots and stains
very well.
You can get GM-approved cleaning products from your
dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on
page 5-90.
Here are some cleaning tips:
• Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
• Clean up stains as soon as you can – before
they set.
• Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
• Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean
area often. A soft brush may be used if stains are
stubborn.
• If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning, clean
the entire area immediately or it will set.
Cleaning Coated Moldings
These moldings are around the hatch opening in the
rear area.
• When lightly soiled, wipe with a sponge or soft
lint-free cloth dampened with water.
• When heavily soiled, use warm soapy water.
5-83
Cleaning Leather
Cleaning Interior Plastic Components
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or
saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let
the leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth
or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the
surface finish.
• For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner.
• Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.
• Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned
immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the finish,
it can harm the leather.
Cleaning the Top of the Instrument
Panel
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones
or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the
windshield and even make it difficult to see through
the windshield under certain conditions.
5-84
Cleaning the Security Shade and
Convenience Net
Wash with warm water and mild detergent, rinse with
cold water and tumble dry on low. Do not use chlorine
bleach.
Cleaning Glass Surfaces
Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner
or a liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal
tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass.
See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-90.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when
cleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could
scratch the glass and/or cause damage to the
rear window defogger and the integrated radio
antenna. When cleaning the glass on your vehicle,
use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do,
it may severely weaken them. In a crash,
they might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six
months. During very cold, damp weather more frequent
application may be required. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11.
Cleaning the Outside of Your
Vehicle
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth
of color, gloss retention and durability.
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep it
clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.
Do not wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong soaps
or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,
removing all soap residue completely. You can get
GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer.
See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-90.
Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum
based, or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning
agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed
to dry on the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish
with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to
avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
5-85
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
your vehicle.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that does not have enough
clearance for the undercarriage and/or wide rear
tires, you could damage your vehicle. Verify with the
manager of the car wash that your vehicle will fit
before entering the car wash or use a touchless
car wash.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a
car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow previous instructions under “Washing Your
Vehicle.”
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products
from your dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials on page 5-90.
Your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish.
The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain
on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as
possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that
are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove
foreign matter.
5-86
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish
looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Cleaning Windshield and Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap or other material may be on the blade
or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a full-strength
glass cleaning liquid. The windshield is clean if beads do
not form when you rinse it with water.
If you use a glass treatment or conditioner containing
ethyl alcohol or ethyl sulfate on your glass, be sure
to remove the acrylic roof panel, if so equipped. These
products may damage the panel.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by
wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade
with water.
Cleaning Removable Roof Panel
Special care is necessary when cleaning, removing
and/or storing the roof panel.
• Flush with water to remove dust and dirt, then dry
the panel.
• Clean the panel with GM Glass Cleaner. Leave the
cleaner on the panel for one minute, then wipe the
panel with a soft, lint-free cloth.
• Do not use abrasive cleaning materials
If water drops are frequently allowed to dry on roof
panel, impurities in the water will adhere to the
top. These impurities may etch or mar the finish.
When the panel gets wet, you should dry it off.
Notice: If you use a glass treatment and/or
conditioner that contains ethyl alcohol or ethyl
sulfate on the roof panel, you could damage
the panel. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Only use a GM-approved glass
cleaner on the roof panel.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
5-87
Cleaning the Convertible Top
Cleaning Aluminum Wheels
Your convertible top should be cleaned often. If you use
an automatic car wash, use one with water jets and
hanging cloths. High pressure car washes may cause
water to enter your vehicle.
Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with
mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax
may then be applied.
When you hand wash the top, do it in partial shade.
Use a mild soap, lukewarm water and a soft sponge.
A chamois or cloth may leave lint on the top, and a brush
can chafe the threads in the top fabric. Do not use
detergents, harsh cleaners, solvents or bleaching agents.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because you could damage the surface. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Wet the entire vehicle and wash the top evenly to avoid
spots or rings. Let the soap remain on the fabric for
a few minutes. When the top is really dirty, use a mild
foam-type cleaner. Your dealer has a Convertible
Top Cleaner and Water Repellent. Thoroughly rinse the
entire vehicle, then let the top dry in direct sunlight.
To protect the convertible top:
• After you wash the vehicle, make sure the top is
completely dry before you lower it.
• Do not get any cleaner on the vehicle’s painted
finish; it could leave streaks.
• If you decide to go through an automatic car wash,
ask the manager if the equipment could damage
your top.
5-88
Do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Cleaning Tires
To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
Finish Damage
Magnesium Wheel Finish
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away.
Notice: Improper paint repair or refinishing can
cause corrosion damage to a magnesium wheel.
See your dealer if a magnesium wheel needs paint
repair or refinishing.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials avaliable from your dealer or other service
outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected
in your dealer’s body and paint shop.
Carbon Fiber Hood
(Z06 Commemorative Edition
Model Only)
The hood on the Z06 Commemorative Edition model
is made from an advanced carbon fiber composite.
Under certain lighting conditions, the carbon fiber has
a faint woven appearance and can be seen through the
paint, but not felt. It is most obvious when viewing
the reflection of an object in the surface of the hood.
The edges of the object in the reflection will appear
slightly jagged, due to the woven carbon fiber material.
This is normal. No special care is needed.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan and
exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can
do this for you.
Titanium Exhaust System (Z06 Only)
Time and high performance driving conditions can
cause a color change in titanium exhaust system parts.
This is normal for a titanium surface.
5-89
Fiberglass Springs
Notice: If you use acidic or corrosive cleaning
products, engine degreasers or aluminum cleaning
agents on fiberglass springs, you may damage
the springs. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Use only approved cleaners
when cleaning your vehicle’s fiberglass springs.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage
can take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint
surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
See your GM dealer for more information on purchasing
the following products.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Tar and Road
Oil Remover
Chrome Cleaner
and Polish
White Sidewall
Tire Cleaner
Vinyl Cleaner
Glass Cleaner
Chrome and Wire
Wheel Cleaner
Finish Enhancer
5-90
Usage
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Removes tar, road oil
and asphalt.
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Cleans vinyl tops,
upholstery and
convertible tops.
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
wipe off.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
(cont’d)
Description
Usage
Removes swirl marks,
fine scratches and
Swirl Remover Polish
other light surface
contamination.
Removes light scratches
Cleaner Wax
and protects finish.
Cleans, shines and
Foaming Tire Shine
protects in one easy step,
Low Gloss
no wiping necessary.
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
Wash Wax Concentrate
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Quickly and easily
removes spots and stains
Spot Lifter
from carpets, vinyl and
cloth upholstery.
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on
Odor Eliminator
fabrics, vinyl, leather
and carpet.
See your General Motors parts department for these
products. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-11.
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code.
This code will help you identify your engine,
specifications and replacement parts.
5-91
Service Parts Identification Label
Headlamp Wiring
You will find this label located inside the glovebox. It is
very helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this
label is:
The headlamp wiring is protected by a circuit breaker.
An electrical overload will cause the lamps to go on and
off, or in some cases to remain off. If this happens,
have your headlamp wiring checked right away.
•
•
•
•
your VIN,
the model designation,
paint information and
a list of all production options and special equipment
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle
unless you check with your dealer first. Some
electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and
the damage wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
Some add-on electrical equipment can keep other
components from working as they should.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting
to add anything electrical to your vehicle, see
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-49.
5-92
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a fuse and
an internal circuit breaker. If the motor overheats
due to heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the
motor cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical
problem and not snow, etc., be sure to get it fixed.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Circuit breakers protect the power seats and other
power accessories. When the current load is too heavy,
the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the
circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of maxi-fuses, mini-fuses
and circuit breakers. This greatly reduces the chance
of fires caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and do not have
a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle
that you can get along without – like the radio or
cigarette lighter – and use its fuse, if it is the correct
amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The instrument panel fuse
block is located on the
passenger’s side of
the vehicle, under the
instrument panel and
under the toe-board.
Remove the carpet and toe-board covering to access
the fuse block by pulling at the top of each corner
of the panel. Then turn the fuse block door knob
counterclockwise and pull the door to access the fuses.
5-93
Fuse
Fuse
5-94
Usage
Usage
8
Stoplamp, Hazard Flashers
9
Body Control Module
10
Windshield Wiper/Washer
11
Accessory Power
12
Blank
13
Body Control Module – Ignition 1
14
Crank
15
Hazard/Turn Signal
16
Air Bag
17
Tonneau Release
18
HVAC Controls
19
Instrument Panel Control
20
Cruise Control
21
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System and Inside Rearview
Mirror
1
Console Cigarette Lighter
2
Monitored (Inadvertent) Load
Control
3
Lumbar Seat
4
Driver Seat Control Module
5
Radio, Compact Disc Player
22
Body Control Module – Ignition 3
6
Parking Lamps, Taillamps
23
Body Control Module – Ignition 2
7
Cigarette Lighter
24
Radio Antenna
Fuse
Usage
Relay
Usage
25
Body Control Module – Ignition 1
Instrument Panel Control
37
Monitored (Inadvertent) Load
Control
26
Hatch/Trunk Release
38
Right Daytime Running Lamp
27
HVAC Controls
39
Hatch/Trunk Release
28
Bose Speakers
40
Left Daytime Running Lamp
29
Diagnostic
41
Tonneau Release
30
Right Door Control Module
42
Courtesy Lamps
31
Power Feed Door Right
43
32
Fuel Tank Door
Automatic Lamp Control Parking
Lamps
33
Door Control Module Left
44
Automatic Lamp Control Headlamps
45
Bose Speakers
46
Rear Defogger
34
Power Feed Door Left
47
Ignition 1
48
Rear Defogger
49
Blank
50
Ignition 2
51
Blower Motor
52
Starter
53
Blank
Circuit Breaker
Usage
35
Driver Power Seat
36
Passenger Power Seat
54
Headlamps
5-95
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
Fuse
Usage
There is one fuse block in the engine compartment
located on the passenger’s side of the vehicle in front
of the battery.
1
Rear Fog Lamp
2
Approach
To remove the fuse block cover, turn the knob
counterclockwise.
3
Right Headlamp Motor
4
Left Headlamp Motor
5
Anti-Lock Brakes, Selective Ride
Control
6
Fog Lamp
7
Blank
5-96
Fuse
Usage
Fuse
Usage
8
Headlamp Low-Beam Right
25
Blank
9
Headlamp High-Beam Right
26
Blank
10
Headlamp Low-Beam Left
27
Spare
11
Horn
28
Spare
12
Headlamp High-Beam Left
29
Spare
13
Fuel Pump
30
Spare
14
Cooling Fan – Ignition 3
31
Spare
15
Oxygen Sensor
32
Spare
16
Powertrain Control Module
46
Cooling Fan 2
17
Throttle Control
47
Blank
18
Injector 2
48
Blank
19
Engine Ignition
49
Cooling Fan 1
20
Blank
50
Air Pump
21
Blank
51
Selective Ride Control
22
Injector 1
52
Anti-Lock Brakes
23
Powertrain Control Module
53
Anti-Lock Brakes Electronics
24
Air Conditioning
54
Fuse Puller
5-97
Relay
5-98
Usage
Relay
Usage
33
Air Pump
40
Blank
34
Air Conditioner and Clutch
41
Blank
35
Fuel Pump
42
Ignition 1
36
Horn
43
Cooling Fan 2
37
Rear Fog Lamp
44
Cooling Fan 3
38
Back-Up Lamps
45
Cooling Fan 1
39
Fog Lamp
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions.
Please refer to Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11 for more information.
Capacities and Specifications
Application
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Capacities
English
Metric
1.75 lbs
0.79 kg
Automatic Transmission
Drain and Refill
5.0 quarts
4.7 L
Overhaul
10.8 quarts
10.2 L
Cooling System
12.6 quarts
11.9 L
Engine Oil with Filter
6.5 quarts
6.1 L
18.0 gallons
68.0 L
4.1 quarts
3.8 L
100 lb ft
140 Y
Fuel Tank
Manual Transmission (Overhaul)
Wheel Nut Torque
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling
5-99
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
Firing Order
LS1 V8
G
Automatic
0.040 inch
(1.016 mm)
1–8–7–2–6–5–4–3
LS1 V8
G
Manual
0.040 inch
(1.016 mm)
1–8–7–2–6–5–4–3
LS6 V8
S
Manual
0.040 inch
(1.016 mm)
1–8–7–2–6–5–4–3
Engine Data
Engine
Horsepower
Torque
Displacement
Compression Ratio
LS1 Automatic
Transmission
350 @ 5200 rpm
360 lb ft @ 4000 rpm
5.7 L
10.1:1
LS1 Manual
Transmission
350 @ 5200 rpm
375 lb ft @ 4400 rpm
5.7 L
10.1:1
LS6
405 @ 6000 rpm
400 lb ft @ 4800 rpm
5.7 L
10.5:1
5-100
Section 6
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2
Introduction ...................................................6-2
Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2
Using Your Maintenance Schedule ....................6-2
Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-4
Additional Required Services ............................6-6
Maintenance Footnotes ...................................6-7
Owner Checks and Services ............................6-8
At Each Fuel Fill ............................................6-8
At Least Once a Month ...................................6-9
At Least Once a Year .....................................6-9
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............6-11
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..........6-13
Engine Drive Belt Routing ..............................6-14
Maintenance Record .....................................6-15
6-1
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level
of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,
be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer
for details.
Maintenance Requirements
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are
necessary to keep your vehicle in good working
condition. Any damage caused by failure to follow
scheduled maintenance may not be covered by
warranty.
6-2
We at General Motors want to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we do not know
exactly how you will drive it. You may drive very
short distances only a few times a week. Or you may
drive long distances all the time in very hot, dusty
weather. You may use your vehicle in making deliveries.
Or you may drive it to work, to do errands or in many
other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your GM Goodwrench dealer.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on the tire and
loading information label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-33.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 5-4.
The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
Required Services on page 6-6 and Maintenance
Footnotes on page 6-7 for further information.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle
can be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs,
you can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
see your GM Goodwrench dealer to have a
qualified technician do the work.
Some maintenance services can be complex.
So, unless you are technically qualified and have
the necessary equipment, you should have your
GM Goodwrench dealer do these jobs.
When you go to your GM Goodwrench dealer for your
service needs, you will know that GM-trained and
supported service technicians will perform the work
using genuine GM parts.
If you want to get service information, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-11.
Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 tells you
what should be checked, when to check it and what
you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in
good condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-11 and Normal Maintenance Replacement
Parts on page 6-13. When your vehicle is serviced,
make sure these are used. All parts should be replaced
and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone
else drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of
genuine GM parts.
6-3
Scheduled Maintenance
When the CHANGE OIL SOON message comes on,
it means that service is required for your vehicle.
Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the
next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are
driving under the best conditions, the engine oil life
system may not indicate that vehicle service is necessary
for over a year. However, your engine oil and filter must
be changed at least once a year and at this time the
system must be reset. Your GM Goodwrench dealer has
GM-trained service technicians who will perform this work
using genuine GM parts and reset the system.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles
(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to
reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed.
See Engine Oil on page 5-13 for information on
the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system.
6-4
When the CHANGE OIL SOON message appears,
certain services, checks and inspections are required.
Required services are described in the following for
“Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally,
it is recommended that your first service be
Maintenance I, your second service be Maintenance II
and that you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II
thereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance II
may be required more often.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the message
comes on within ten months since vehicle was
purchased or Maintenance II was performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the message comes on ten
months or more since the last service or if the message
has not come on at all for one year.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I
Maintenance II
Change engine oil and filter. Reset oil life system. See Engine Oil on
page 5-13. An Emission Control Service.
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (g).
•
•
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18. An Emission Control Service. See footnote †.
•
•
Check tire inflation pressures and tire wear. See Tires on page 5-55.
•
•
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
•
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as
needed.
•
•
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in
this section.
•
•
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
•
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
•
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
•
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
•
6-5
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated
miles (kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(41 500)
50,000
(83 000)
75,000
(125 000)
100,000
(166 000)
125,000
(207 500)
150,000
(240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage
or leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Service
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter (severe service).
See footnote (h).
•
•
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter (normal service).
•
Replace spark plugs and inspect spark
plug wires. An Emission Control Service.
•
•
Engine cooling system service (or every
5 years, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
•
6-6
Maintenance Footnotes
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,
parking brake, etc.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose or missing parts
or signs of wear. Inspect power steering lines and hoses
for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if they
are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace with genuine GM parts as
needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test
of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.
(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking.
Replace blade inserts that appear worn or damaged
or that streak or miss areas of the windshield.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages
are working properly. Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything
that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job,
have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts
replaced. Also look for any opened or broken air bag
coverings, and have them repaired or replaced. (The air
bag system does not need regular maintenance.)
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders and body door
hinges.Lubricate all hinges and latches, including those
for the hood, rear compartment, console door and
any folding seat hardware. More frequent lubrication
may be required when exposed to a corrosive
environment. Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips
with a clean cloth will make them last longer, seal
better and not stick or squeak.
(g) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired
and the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
6-7
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− Uses such as high performance operation.
(i) Drain, flush and refill cooling system. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-23 for what to use. Inspect hoses.
Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and filler neck.
Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap.
Owner Checks and Services
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-13 for further
details.
Notice: It is important to check your oil regularly
and keep it at the proper level. Failure to keep your
engine oil at the proper level can cause damage
to your engine not covered by your warranty.
Engine Coolant Level Check
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,
dependability and emission control performance of your
vehicle. Your GM Goodwrench dealer can assist you
with these checks and services.
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-23 for further details.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11.
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary.
6-8
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
At Least Once a Month
At Least Once a Year
Tire Inflation Check
Starter Switch Check
Visually inspect your tires and make sure tires are
inflated to the correct pressures. See Tires on page 5-55
for further details.
{CAUTION:
Cassette Tape Player Service
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
Clean cassette tape player. Cleaning should be done
every 50 hours of tape play. See Audio System(s)
on page 3-69 for further details.
Power Antenna Service
Clean power antenna mast. See Audio System(s) on
page 3-69 for further details.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-31 if necessary.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. On automatic transmission vehicles, try to start the
engine in each gear. The starter should work only
in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If the starter works in
any other position, contact your GM Goodwrench
dealer for service.
4. On manual transmission vehicles, put the shift lever
in NEUTRAL (N), push the clutch pedal down
halfway and try to start the engine. The starter
should work only when the clutch pedal is pushed
down all the way to the floor. If the starter works
when the clutch is not pushed all the way down,
contact your GM Goodwrench dealer for service.
6-9
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
{CAUTION:
Ignition Automatic Transmission Lock
Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition key to OFF in each shift lever position.
• The key should turn to OFF only when the shift lever
is in PARK (P).
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-31 if necessary.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the key to the ON position,
but do not start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out
of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of PARK (P), contact your GM
Goodwrench dealer for service.
6-10
• The key should come out only in OFF.
Contact your GM Goodwrench dealer if service is
required.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
to move.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from
the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number or specification may be obtained from your
dealer.
Usage
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then
release the parking brake followed by the regular
brake.
Contact your GM Goodwrench dealer if service is
required.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
Engine Oil
Fluid/Lubricant
The engine requires a special
engine oil meeting GM Standard
GM4718M. Oils meeting this
standard may be identified as
synthetic, and should also be
identified with the American
Petroleum Institute Certified for
Gasoline Engines starburst symbol.
However, not all synthetic API oils
with the starburst symbol will meet
this GM standard. You should look
for and use only an oil that meets
GM Standard GM4718M. For the
proper viscosity, see Engine Oil on
page 5-13.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
Engine Coolant Coolant.
See Engine Coolant on
page 5-23.
6-11
Usage
Hydraulic
Brake System
Fluid/Lubricant
Hydraulic Clutch Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345347,
in Canada 10953517) or equivalent
DOT-3 brake fluid.
Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering GM
(GM
Part No.U.S. 89021184,
System
in Canada 89021186).
Manual
Transmission
DEXRON®-III Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Automatic
Transmission
DEXRON®-III Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Key Lock
Cylinders
6-12
Fluid/Lubricant
Rear Axle
(Limited-Slip
Differential)
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle
Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S.
12378261, in Canada 10953455)
meeting GM Specification 9986115.
With a complete drain and
refill add 4 ounces (118 ml) of
Limited-Slip Axle Lubricant Additive
(GM Part No. U.S. 1052358, in
Canada 992694) where required.
See Rear Axle on page 5-47.
Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Windshield
GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Washer Solvent
Hydraulic
Clutch System
Usage
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Latch, Pivots,
Spring Anchor
and Release
Pawl
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
in Canada 992723) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Hood and
Door Hinges
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
GM Part Number
AC Delco®
Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
25042562
A917C
Engine Oil Filter
25010633
PF44
PCV Valve
25179136
CV948C
Spark Plug
12571164
41-985
Windshield Wiper Blade (Shepherd’s Hook Type)
22 inches (55.9 cm)
22143943
—
Part
6-13
Engine Drive Belt Routing
6-14
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2 in this section.
Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 can be added on the following record
pages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
6-15
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
6-16
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Section 7
Customer Assistance and Information
Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2
Online Owner Center ......................................7-3
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY) Users ...............................................7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-4
GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities ..................................................7-5
Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-6
Courtesy Transportation ...................................7-7
Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Records .....................................................7-9
Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-10
Reporting Safety Defects to the United States
Government ..............................................7-10
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ..............................................7-11
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors .........................................7-11
Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-11
7-1
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the operation of your
vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or
the general manager.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center by calling
1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact GM of Canada
Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling
1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
7-2
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (This is available from
the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the
top left of the instrument panel and visible through
the windshield.)
• Dealership name and location
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer
are committed to making sure you are completely
satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue
to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with the
BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional
rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for
information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP).
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding
vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to
resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior
to filing a court action, use of the program is free of
charge and your case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in
your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other
venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the
following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1804
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves
the right to change eligibility limitations and/or
discontinue its participation in this program.
Online Owner Center
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. You can find your specific vehicle information
all in one place.
The Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner’s manual. (United States only)
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members. (United States only)
Refer to the web for updated information.
To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com.
(United States) or My GM Canada within
www.gmcanada.com (Canada).
7-3
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate
with Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438).
(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Customer Assistance Offices
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes
to write to Chevrolet, the letter should be addressed to
Chevrolet’s Customer Assistance Center.
United States – Customer Assistance
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA® (243-8872)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Canada – Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
7-4
Overseas – Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean
Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico
and U.S. Virgin Islands) – Customer
Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
GM Mobility Program for Persons
with Disabilities
This program, available to
qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000
toward eligible aftermarket
driver or passenger
adaptive equipment you
may require for your vehicle
(hand controls, wheelchair/
scooter lifts, etc.).
This program can also provide you with free resource
information, such as area driver assessment centers
and mobility equipment installers. The offer is available
for a limited period of time from the date of vehicle
purchase/lease. For more details, or to determine your
vehicle’s eligibility, see your GM dealer or call the
GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.
Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details.
All TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.
7-5
Roadside Assistance Program
• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire will be
covered at no charge. (The customer is responsible
for the repair or replacement of the tire if not covered
by a warrantable failure.)
Security While You Travel
1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872)
As the proud owner of a new Chevrolet vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the Chevrolet Roadside
Assistance program. This value-added service is
intended to provide you with peace of mind as you drive
in the city or travel the open road. Chevrolet’s Roadside
Assistance toll-free number is staffed by courteous
and capable Roadside Assistance Representatives who
are available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
We will provide the following services during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period, at no expense
to you:
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel
($5 maximum) for the customer to get to the
nearest service station.
• Lock-out Service (identification required):
Replacement keys or locksmith service will be
covered at no charge if you are unable to gain entry
into your vehicle. Delivery of the replacement key will
be covered within 10 miles.
• Emergency Tow: Tow to the nearest dealership for
warranty service or in the event of a vehicle-disabling
accident. Assistance when the vehicle is mired in
sand, mud or snow.
7-6
• Jump Start: No-start occurrences which require a
battery jump start will be covered at no charge.
• Dealer Locator Service
In many instances, mechanical failures are covered
under Chevrolet’s Bumper-to-Bumper warranty.
However, when other services are utilized, our Roadside
Assistance Representatives will explain any payment
obligations you might incur.
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please
provide the following to the Roadside Assistance
Representative:
• Your name, home address, and home telephone
number
•
•
•
•
Telephone number of your location
Location of the vehicle
Model, year, color, and license plate number
Mileage, Vehicle Identification Number and delivery
date of the vehicle
• Description of the problem
While we hope you never have the occasion to use our
service, it is added security while traveling for you and
your family. Remember, we are only a phone call away.
Chevrolet Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA
(1-800-234-8872), text telephone (TTY) users, call
1-888-889-2438.
Chevrolet reserves the right to limit services or
reimbursement to an owner or driver when, in
Chevrolet’s judgement, the claims become excessive
in frequency or type of occurrence.
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Buick reserves the right to make any changes or
discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any
time without notification.
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
roadside assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book.
Courtesy Transportation
Chevrolet has always exemplified quality and value
in its offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your
ownership experience, we and our participating dealers
are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer
support program for new vehicles.
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to
retail purchase/lease customers in conjunction with
the Bumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation
options are available when warranty repairs are
required. This will reduce your inconvenience during
warranty repairs.
Plan Ahead When Possible
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you
should contact your dealer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising
your service consultant of your transportation needs,
your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem
is safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership,
let them know this, and ask for instructions.
7-7
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle
off for service, you are urged to do so as early in
the work day as possible to allow for same day repair.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait Chevrolet
helps minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle
service to get you to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes a
one way or round trip shuttle service to a destination
up to 10 miles from the dealership.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
reimbursement (five day maximum) may be available
for the use of public transportation such as taxi or bus.
7-8
In addition, should you arrange transportation through a
friend or relative, reimbursement for reasonable fuel
expenses (five day maximum) may be available. Claim
amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported
by original receipts.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle
you obtained if your vehicle is kept for a warranty repair.
Reimbursement will be limited to a maximum of
$30.00 a day and must be supported by receipts.
This requires that you sign and complete a rental
agreement and meet state, local and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and
may include minimum age requirements, insurance
coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible for
fuel usage charges and may also be responsible for
taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage or
rental usage beyond the completion of the repair.
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as
a courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period,
but it is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
A separate booklet entitled “Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information” furnished with each new vehicle
provides detailed warranty coverage information.
Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating
dealers and all program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at every dealer. Please
contact you dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during
the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult
your dealer for details.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Records
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has a
number of sophisticated computer systems that monitor
and control several aspects of the vehicle’s performance.
Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle computers to monitor
emission control components to optimize fuel economy,
to monitor conditions for airbag deployment and, if so
equipped, to provide anti-lock braking and to help the
driver control the vehicle in difficult driving situations.
Some information may be stored during regular
operations to facilitate repair of detected malfunctions;
other information is stored only in a crash or near crash
event by computer systems commonly called event data
recorders (EDR).
In a crash or near crash event, computer systems, such
as the Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) in
your vehicle may record information about the condition
of the vehicle and how it was operated, such as engine
speed, brake applications, throttle position, vehicle
speed, seat belt usage, airbag readiness, airbag
performance data, and the severity of a collision.
This information has been used to improve vehicle
crash performance and may be used to improve crash
performance of future vehicles and driving safety.
Unlike the data recorders on many airplanes, these
on-board systems do not record sounds, such as
conversation of vehicle occupants.
7-9
To read this information, special equipment is needed
and access to the vehicle or the SDM is required.
GM will not access information about a crash event or
share it with others other than
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee,
• in response to an official request of police or similar
government office,
• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through the
discovery process, or
• as required by law.
In addition, once GM collects or receives data, GM may
• use the data for GM research needs,
• make it available for research where appropriate
confidentiality is to be maintained and need is
shown, or
• share summary data which is not tied to a specific
vehicle with non-GM organizations for research
purposes.
Others, such as law enforcement, may have access to
the special equipment that can read the information
if they have access to the vehicle or SDM.
If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar, please check
the OnStar subscription service agreement or manual for
information on its operations and data collection.
7-10
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying
General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Service Publications Ordering
Information
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
Transport Canada
330 Sparks Street
Tower C
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
Service Manuals
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars
and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to
assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us.
Please call us at 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle, suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $120.00
Service Bulletins
In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service
Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General
Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE
(1-800-463-7483).
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
7-11
Owner’s Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include
the Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $60.00
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $20.00
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday – Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P. O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Service Publications are available for current and
past model GM vehicles. To request an order form,
please specify year and model name of the vehicle.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
7-12
A
Accessory Power Outlets ................................. 3-22
Activating the Theft-Deterrent Feature ................ 3-86
Active Handling System ................................... 4-10
Active Handling System Light ........................... 3-40
Adding Washer Fluid ....................................... 5-36
Additional Program Information ........................... 7-9
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-6
Add-On Electrical Equipment ............................ 5-92
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) ........ 3-72, 3-78
Air Bag
Off Light ..................................................... 3-36
Readiness Light .......................................... 3-35
Air Bag System .............................................. 1-40
Air Bag Off Switch ....................................... 1-46
How Does an Air Bag Restrain? .................... 1-44
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 1-49
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? .................... 1-43
What Will You See After an
Air Bag Inflates? ...................................... 1-44
When Should an Air Bag Inflate? ................... 1-43
Where Are the Air Bags? .............................. 1-42
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-18
Air Compressor .............................................. 5-78
Air Dam, Front ............................................... 2-19
Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) ......... 7-9
AM ............................................................... 3-88
Antenna, Fixed Mast ....................................... 3-89
Antenna, Power Antenna Mast Care .................. 3-90
Antennas, Integrated Windshield and
Rear Window .............................................. 3-90
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ............................ 4-7
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light ............... 3-39
Appearance Care ............................................ 5-82
Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-85
Chemical Paint Spotting ............................... 5-90
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle ................ 5-83
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle .............. 5-85
Fiberglass Springs ....................................... 5-90
Finish Damage ............................................ 5-89
Titanium Exhaust System .............................. 5-89
Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-89
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................ 5-90
Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-85
Arming the System ......................................... 2-16
Ashtrays ........................................................ 3-23
Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-69
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ................ 3-88
Care of Your CD Player ............................... 3-89
Care of Your CDs ........................................ 3-89
Fixed Mast Antenna ..................................... 3-89
Integrated Windshield and Rear Window
Antennas ................................................ 3-90
Power Antenna Mast Care ............................ 3-90
Radio with Cassette ..................................... 3-70
Radio with CD ............................................ 3-76
Setting the Time .......................................... 3-69
Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................ 3-86
1
Audio System(s) (cont.)
Trunk-Mounted CD Changer ..........................
Understanding Radio Reception .....................
Automatic Transmission ...................................
Fluid ..........................................................
Operation ...................................................
3-81
3-88
2-21
5-20
2-25
B
Battery .......................................................... 5-40
Battery Replacement ......................................... 2-8
Battery Run-Down Protection ............................ 3-18
Before Leaving on a Long Trip ......................... 4-25
Brake
Parking ...................................................... 2-31
System Warning Light .................................. 3-38
Brake Fluid .................................................... 5-37
Brake Wear ................................................... 5-39
Brakes .......................................................... 5-37
Braking ........................................................... 4-6
Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-9
Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-19
Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-48
Back-Up Lamps ........................................... 5-52
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-48
Headlamps ................................................. 5-48
Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 5-52
Taillamps and Turn Signal Lamps .................. 5-50
Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-66
2
C
California Fuel .................................................. 5-5
Canada – Customer Assistance .......................... 7-4
Canadian Owners ................................................ ii
Canadian Roadside Assistance ........................... 7-7
Capacities and Specifications ............................ 5-99
Carbon Fiber Hood ......................................... 5-89
Carbon Monoxide ................... 4-28, 4-38, 2-11, 2-36
Care of
Safety Belts ................................................ 5-85
Your Cassette Tape Player ............................ 3-88
Your CD Player ........................................... 3-89
Your CDs ................................................... 3-89
Cargo Cover .................................................. 2-43
Cassette Tape Messages ................................. 3-75
Cassette Tape Player Service ............................. 6-9
CD Adapter Kits ............................................. 3-75
CD Changer, Trunk-Mounted ............................ 3-81
CD Messages ........................................ 3-80, 3-85
Center Console Storage Area ........................... 2-40
Chains, Tires .................................................. 5-71
Check
Engine Light ............................................... 3-41
Gages Warning Light ................................... 3-46
Check Engine Light ......................................... 3-41
Checking Coolant ............................................ 5-24
Checking Engine Oil ........................................ 5-13
Checking Things Under the Hood ......................
Checking Your Restraint Systems ......................
Chemical Paint Spotting ...................................
Child Restraints
Child Restraint Systems ...............................
Infants and Young Children ...........................
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) ..........................
Older Children .............................................
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System ...................................
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Passenger Seat Position ...........................
Top Strap ...................................................
Top Strap Anchor Location ............................
Cigarette Lighter .............................................
Cleaning
Fiberglass Springs .......................................
Inside of Your Vehicle ..................................
Outside of Your Vehicle ................................
Titanium Exhaust System ..............................
Underbody Maintenance ...............................
Weatherstrips ..............................................
Cleaning Aluminum Wheels ..............................
Cleaning Coated Moldings ................................
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .......................
Cleaning Fabric/Carpet ....................................
Cleaning Glass Surfaces ..................................
5-10
1-49
5-90
1-25
1-22
1-30
1-19
1-33
1-36
1-28
1-30
3-23
5-90
5-83
5-85
5-89
5-89
5-85
5-88
5-83
5-86
5-83
5-84
Cleaning Interior Plastic Components ................. 5-84
Cleaning Leather ............................................ 5-84
Cleaning Removable Roof Panel ....................... 5-87
Cleaning the Convertible Top ............................ 5-88
Cleaning the Security Shade and
Convenience Net ......................................... 5-84
Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel ........... 5-84
Cleaning Tires ................................................ 5-88
Cleaning Windshield and Wiper Blades .............. 5-87
Climate Control System
Dual Automatic ............................................ 3-23
Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-31
Clutch, Hydraulic ............................................. 5-22
Competitive Driving Mode ................................ 4-12
Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-6
Convenience Net ............................................ 2-43
Convertible Top .............................................. 2-50
Lowering the Convertible Top ........................ 2-51
Raising the Convertible Top .......................... 2-55
Coolant
Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-41
Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-23
Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............................. 5-26
Cooling System .............................................. 5-29
Courtesy Lamps ............................................. 3-17
Cruise Control ................................................ 3-10
Cupholder(s) .................................................. 2-40
Current and Past Model Order Forms ................ 7-12
3
Customer Assistance Information
Courtesy Transportation .................................. 7-7
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users ............................... 7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-4
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2
GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities ................................................ 7-5
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors ....... 7-11
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ............................................ 7-11
Reporting Safety Defects to the United States
Government ............................................ 7-10
Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-6
Service Publications Ordering Information ......... 7-11
D
Daytime Running Lamps .................................. 3-15
Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2
Defogging and Defrosting ................................. 3-30
Disabling the Theft-Deterrent Feature ................. 3-87
Disarming the System ..................................... 2-17
Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-3
Door
Locks .......................................................... 2-9
Power Door Locks ....................................... 2-10
Downshifting (Manual Transmission) .................. 2-30
4
Driver
Position, Safety Belt ..................................... 1-12
Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-48
DIC Controls and Displays ............................ 3-49
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-58
Other Messages .......................................... 3-68
Driving
At Night ..................................................... 4-19
City ........................................................... 4-23
Defensive ..................................................... 4-2
Drunken ....................................................... 4-3
Freeway ..................................................... 4-24
Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-26
In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-20
Winter ........................................................ 4-28
Driving On Snow or Ice ................................... 4-29
Driving Through Deep Standing Water ............... 4-22
Driving Through Flowing Water ......................... 4-22
Dual Automatic Climate Control System ............. 3-23
E
Electrical System
Add-On Equipment ......................................
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...........................
Headlamp Wiring .........................................
Power Windows and Other Power Options ......
Windshield Wiper Fuses ...............................
5-92
5-93
5-92
5-92
5-92
Emergency Trunk Release Handle
(Convertible Only) ........................................ 2-13
Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs ................................. 3-44
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-18
Battery ....................................................... 5-40
Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............ 3-41
Coolant ...................................................... 5-23
Coolant Heater ............................................ 2-23
Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... 3-41
Drive Belt Routing ....................................... 6-14
Engine Compartment Overview ...................... 5-12
Exhaust ..................................................... 2-36
Oil ............................................................. 5-13
Oil Pressure Gage ....................................... 3-44
Overheating ................................................ 5-26
Starting ...................................................... 2-21
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ...................... 5-96
Engine Oil Additives ........................................ 5-16
Event Data Records (EDR) ................................ 7-9
Exit/Entry Lighting ........................................... 3-17
Express-Down Window .................................... 2-15
Extended Mobility Tires (Except Z06) ................. 5-61
Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-19
Exterior Lamps ............................................... 3-13
F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-18
Finding a Station .................................... 3-71, 3-77
Finish Care .................................................... 5-86
Finish Damage ............................................... 5-89
Fixed Mast Antenna ........................................ 3-89
Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-8
Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-75
Floor Mats ..................................................... 2-41
Fluid
Automatic Transmission ................................ 5-20
Manual Transmission .................................... 5-21
Power Steering ........................................... 5-35
Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-36
FM ............................................................... 3-88
Fog Lamps .................................................... 3-15
Front Air Dam ................................................ 2-19
Fuel ............................................................... 5-4
Additives ...................................................... 5-6
California Fuel .............................................. 5-5
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .................... 5-10
Filling Your Tank ........................................... 5-7
Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-6
Gage ......................................................... 3-46
Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-4
Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-5
5
Fuses
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-93
Windshield Wiper ......................................... 5-92
G
Gage
Check Gages Warning Light .......................... 3-46
Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-41
Engine Oil Pressure ..................................... 3-44
Fuel .......................................................... 3-46
Speedometer .............................................. 3-34
Tachometer ................................................. 3-34
Voltmeter Gage ........................................... 3-37
Gasoline
Octane ........................................................ 5-4
Specifications ............................................... 5-5
Glove Box ..................................................... 2-40
GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities .................................................... 7-5
H
Hatch/Trunk ................................................... 2-11
Hatch/Trunk Lid Release .................................. 2-12
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-4
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .................... 3-8
6
Headlamp Wiring ............................................ 5-92
Headlamps .................................................... 5-48
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-48
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-48
Headlamps Doors ........................................... 3-14
Headlamps on Reminder ................................... 3-8
Head-Up Display (HUD) ................................... 3-18
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-26
Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-26
Hood
Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10
Release ..................................................... 5-11
Hood, Carbon Fiber ........................................ 5-89
Horn ............................................................... 3-5
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank ................................................. 5-31
How to Add Fluid ............................................ 5-22
How to Check ................................ 5-20, 5-21, 5-63
How to Check and Add Fluid ............................ 5-23
How to Check Lubricant ................................... 5-47
How to Check Power Steering Fluid .................. 5-35
How to Remove and Replace the
Floor Mats .................................................. 2-41
How to Use This Manual ...................................... ii
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-11
Hydraulic Clutch ............................................. 5-22
Hydroplaning .................................................. 4-22
I
K
If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine .......... 5-28
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine ............... 5-27
If the Light Is Flashing ..................................... 3-42
If the Light Is On Steady ................................. 3-43
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard ......................... 4-30
If You Are Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ....... 4-32
Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-20
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-22
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................... 5-62
Inflator Kit, Tire ............................................... 5-77
Installing the Roof Panel .................................. 2-49
Instrument Panel
Cluster ....................................................... 3-33
Overview ..................................................... 3-2
Instrument Panel Brightness ............................. 3-17
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ............................ 5-93
Integrated Windshield and Rear Window
Antennas .................................................... 3-90
Interior Lamps ................................................ 3-17
Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-5
Keys ............................................................... 2-3
J
Jump Starting ................................................. 5-41
L
Lamps
Exterior ...................................................... 3-13
Interior ....................................................... 3-17
Lap Belt Cinch Feature .................................... 1-13
Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................... 1-12
LATCH System
Child Restraints ........................................... 1-30
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System ................................... 1-33
Latches, Seatback ............................................ 1-5
Leaving Your Vehicle ....................................... 2-10
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Running
(Automatic Transmission) ............................... 2-33
Lifting From the Front ...................................... 5-73
Lifting From the Rear ...................................... 5-74
Lifting Your Vehicle, Tires ................................. 5-71
Light
Active Handling System ................................ 3-40
Air Bag Off ................................................. 3-36
Air Bag Readiness ....................................... 3-35
7
Light (cont.)
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ................... 3-39
Brake System Warning ................................. 3-38
Check Gages Warning ................................. 3-46
Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-41
Safety Belt Reminder ................................... 3-34
Security ..................................................... 3-45
TCS Warning Light ...................................... 3-39
Traction Control System (TCS) Warning .......... 3-39
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirrors .............................. 2-15
Limited-Slip Rear Axle ..................................... 4-12
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-33
Lockout Protection .......................................... 2-10
Locks
Door ........................................................... 2-9
Leaving Your Vehicle .................................... 2-10
Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-10
Power Door ................................................ 2-10
Loss of Control ............................................... 4-18
Lowering the Convertible Top ............................ 2-51
M
Magnesium Wheel Finish ................................. 5-89
Magnetic Speed Variable Assist Steering ............ 4-14
Maintenance Schedule
Additional Required Services ........................... 6-6
At Each Fuel Fill ........................................... 6-8
8
Maintenance Schedule (cont.)
At Least Once a Month .................................. 6-9
At Least Once a Year .................................... 6-9
Introduction .................................................. 6-2
Maintenance Footnotes .................................. 6-7
Maintenance Record .................................... 6-15
Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ......... 6-13
Owner Checks and Services ........................... 6-8
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-11
Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-4
Using Your ................................................... 6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2
Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-41
Manual Seats ................................................... 1-2
Manual Transmission ....................................... 2-22
Fluid .......................................................... 5-21
Operation ................................................... 2-28
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle ............... 2-7
Memory ......................................................... 2-57
Message
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-58
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean Islands/
Countries (Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin
Islands) – Customer Assistance ........................ 7-5
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview ........................ 2-38
Manual Rearview Mirror ................................ 2-37
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ................. 2-39
Mirrors (cont.)
Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-39
Outside Power Heated Mirrors ....................... 2-38
Model Reference ................................................ vi
MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-3
N
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-19
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ............ 6-13
Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-31
Outside
Automatic Dimming Mirror ............................. 2-39
Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-39
Power Heated Mirrors .................................. 2-38
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode .......................................... 5-26
Overseas – Customer Assistance ........................ 7-5
Owner Checks and Services .............................. 6-8
Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii
Owner’s Information ........................................ 7-12
O
P
Odometer ...................................................... 3-34
Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-16
Oil
Engine ....................................................... 5-13
Engine Oil Pressure Gage ............................ 3-44
Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-19
One to Four Shift Light
(Manual Transmission) .................................. 2-30
Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-3
Operating the Trunk-Mounted CD Changer
with the Radio with Cassette ......................... 3-83
Operating the Trunk-Mounted CD Changer
with the Radio with CD ................................ 3-84
Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-5
Park (P)
Shifting Into ................................................ 2-32
Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-34
Parking
Brake ........................................................ 2-31
Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-35
Parking Your Vehicle ....................................... 2-35
Passenger Position, Safety Belts ....................... 1-19
Passing ......................................................... 4-16
PASS-Key® .................................................... 2-18
Plan Ahead When Possible ................................ 7-7
Playing a Cassette Tape .................................. 3-73
Playing a CD ................................................. 3-79
Playing the Radio ................................... 3-70, 3-76
9
Power
Accessory Outlets ........................................ 3-22
Antenna Mast Care ...................................... 3-90
Door Locks ................................................. 2-10
Electrical System ......................................... 5-92
Seat ............................................................ 1-2
Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-35
Windows .................................................... 2-15
Power Antenna Service ..................................... 6-9
Power Steering ............................................... 4-14
Q
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-11
R
Racing or Other Competitive Driving ..................
Radios ..........................................................
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ................
Care of Your CD Player ...............................
Care of Your CDs ........................................
Radio with Cassette .....................................
Radio with CD ............................................
Setting the Time ..........................................
Theft-Deterrent ............................................
Trunk-Mounted CD Changer ..........................
Understanding Reception ..............................
10
2-23
3-69
3-88
3-89
3-89
3-70
3-76
3-69
3-86
3-81
3-88
Raising the Convertible Top .............................. 2-55
Reading Lamps .............................................. 3-18
Rear Axle ...................................................... 5-47
Limited-Slip ................................................. 4-12
Rear Storage Area .......................................... 2-42
Rear Window Defogger .................................... 3-31
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming .................. 2-38
Rearview Mirrors ............................................. 2-37
Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-3
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-11
Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-33
Remote Keyless Entry System ............................ 2-5
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation ............. 2-6
Removing the Roof Panel ................................ 2-44
Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-52
Replacing Brake System Parts .......................... 5-40
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash .............................................. 1-50
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government .................................. 7-11
General Motors ........................................... 7-11
United States Government ............................ 7-10
Restraint System Check
Checking Your Restraint Systems ................... 1-49
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash .......................................... 1-50
Restraint Systems
Checking .................................................... 1-49
Replacing Parts ........................................... 1-50
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-21
Roadside
Assistance Program ....................................... 7-6
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out ................... 4-32
Roof Panel .................................................... 2-44
Installing the Roof Panel ............................... 2-49
Removing the Roof Panel ............................. 2-44
Storing the Roof Panel ................................. 2-47
Routing, Engine Drive Belt ............................... 6-14
Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ....... 2-36
S
Safety Belt
Reminder Light ............................................ 3-34
Safety Belts
Care of ...................................................... 5-85
Driver Position ............................................ 1-12
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-11
Passenger Position ...................................... 1-19
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ........ 1-11
Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-19
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-18
Safety Belts Are for Everyone ......................... 1-6
Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iii
Scheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-4
Seatback Latches ............................................. 1-5
Seats
Manual ........................................................ 1-2
Power Seats ................................................. 1-2
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-3
Seatback Latches .......................................... 1-5
Sport Seat ................................................... 1-6
Securing a Child Restraint
Designed for the LATCH System ................... 1-33
Passenger Seat Position ............................... 1-36
Security Light ................................................. 3-45
Security While You Travel .................................. 7-6
Selective Ride Control ..................................... 4-12
Sensors ......................................................... 3-29
Service ........................................................... 5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your
Vehicle ..................................................... 5-4
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-3
Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-41
Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-11
Service Bulletins ............................................. 7-11
Service Manuals ............................................. 7-11
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle ............ 1-49
Setting Preset Stations ............................ 3-71, 3-77
Setting the Time ............................................. 3-69
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble) .................. 3-72, 3-78
Shift Speeds (Manual Transmission) .................. 2-29
Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-32
Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-34
11
Skidding ........................................................ 4-18
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips ....................... 4-22
Specifications, Capacities ................................. 5-99
Speedometer .................................................. 3-34
Sport Seat ....................................................... 1-6
Starter Interlock Feature .................................. 2-23
Starting Your Engine ....................................... 2-21
Steering ........................................................ 4-14
Steering in Emergencies .................................. 4-15
Steering Tips .................................................. 4-14
Storage Areas
Center Console Storage Area ........................ 2-40
Convenience Net ......................................... 2-43
Cupholder(s) ............................................... 2-40
Glove Box .................................................. 2-40
Rear Storage Area ....................................... 2-42
Storing the Roof Panel .................................... 2-47
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ...................... 4-32
Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-15
T
Tachometer .................................................... 3-34
Taillamps
Turn Signal Lamps ...................................... 5-50
TCS Warning Light .......................................... 3-39
Telescopic Steering Column ............................... 3-6
12
Testing the Alarm ............................................ 2-17
Theft-Deterrent, Radio ..................................... 3-86
Theft-Deterrent System .................................... 2-16
Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-16
PASS-Key® ................................................. 2-18
Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-5
Tire Inflation Check ........................................... 6-9
Tire Inflator Kit Storage .................................... 5-80
Tire Sealant ................................................... 5-78
Tire Sidewall Labeling ...................................... 5-55
Tire Size Codes .............................................. 5-57
Tire Terminology and Definitions ........................ 5-58
Tires ............................................................. 5-55
Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-66
Chains ....................................................... 5-71
Extended Mobility (Except Z06) ..................... 5-61
If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-75
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................ 5-62
Lifting Your Vehicle ...................................... 5-71
Pressure Monitor Operation (Except Z06) ........ 5-64
Rotation ..................................................... 5-65
Tire Inflator Kit ............................................ 5-77
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-67
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-68
Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-68
When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-65
To Use The Engine Coolant Heater ................... 2-24
Top Strap ...................................................... 1-28
Top Strap Anchor Location ............................... 1-30
Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission) ............... 2-34
Towing
Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-33
Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-38
Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-33
Traction
Active Handling System ................................ 4-10
Control System (TCS) .................................... 4-9
Control System Warning Light ....................... 3-39
Limited-Slip Rear Axle .................................. 4-12
Selective Ride Control .................................. 4-12
Transmission
Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-20
Fluid, Manual .............................................. 5-21
Transmission Operation, Automatic .................... 2-25
Transmission Operation, Manual ........................ 2-28
Transportation Options ...................................... 7-8
Trunk/Hatch ................................................... 2-11
Trunk-Mounted CD Changer ............................. 3-81
Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-7
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-6
Twilight Sentinel® (Optional in United States,
Standard in Canada) .................................... 3-16
U
Understanding Radio Reception ........................ 3-88
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-67
United States – Customer Assistance .................. 7-4
Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature After a
Power Loss ................................................ 3-87
V
Vehicle
Control ........................................................ 4-6
Damage Warnings ........................................... iv
Loading ...................................................... 4-33
Parking Your ............................................... 2-35
Symbols ......................................................... iv
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Records ............................................... 7-9
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) ............................................. 5-91
Service Parts Identification Label ................... 5-92
Vehicle Personalization
Memory ..................................................... 2-57
Vehicle Storage .............................................. 5-41
Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-31
Visors ........................................................... 2-15
Voltmeter Gage .............................................. 3-37
13
W
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-32
Warnings
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-58
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-4
Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-5
Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii
Vehicle Damage .............................................. iv
Washing Your Vehicle ...................................... 5-85
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use ........................ 5-14
What to Do with Used Oil ................................ 5-17
What to Use .......................... 5-24, 5-35, 5-36, 5-47
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-68
Replacement ............................................... 5-68
When to Add Engine Oil .................................. 5-14
When to Change Engine Oil
(GM Oil Life System) ................................... 5-16
14
When to Check ...................................... 5-21, 5-63
When to Check and What to Use ..................... 5-22
When to Check Lubricant ................................. 5-47
When to Check Power Steering Fluid ................ 5-35
Why Safety Belts Work ..................................... 1-8
Windows ....................................................... 2-14
Power ........................................................ 2-15
Windshield Washer ........................................... 3-9
Fluid .......................................................... 5-36
Windshield Wiper
Blade Replacement ...................................... 5-52
Fuses ........................................................ 5-92
Windshield Wipers ............................................ 3-8
Winter Driving ................................................ 4-28
Y
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2